Contents

Mercedes-Benz C-Class Coupe 2015 Operating Instructions PDF

1 of 270
1 of 270

Summary of Content for Mercedes-Benz C-Class Coupe 2015 Operating Instructions PDF

COMAND Operating Instructions

Order no. 6515 7871 13 Part no. 172 584 58 00 Edition B-2015

1725845800W 1725845800

CO MA

ND Op

era tin

gI ns tru

cti on s

Publication details Internet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding this Operator's Manual to the technical documen- tation team at the following address: Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AG Mercedesstrae 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany

Symbols In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol- lowing symbols:

G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with infor- mation on environmentally aware actions or disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle.

i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in succes- sion indicate an instruction with sev- eral steps.

(Y page)

This symbol tells you where you can find more information about a topic.

Dis play

This font indicates a display in the multifunction display/COMAND dis- play.

Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro- tected by copyright 2005 The FreeType Project http://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved.

As at 31.01.2014

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz First, familiarize yourself with your COMAND system. Read these operating instructions, particularly the safety and warning notes, before you drive off. This will help you to obtain the maximum pleasure from your COMAND system and to avoid endangering yourself and others. The equipment level and functions of your COMAND system may differ depending on: Rmodel Rorder Rcountry specification Ravailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. Consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center if you have further questions. The Operator's Manual and all supplements are integral parts of the vehicle. You should always keep it in the vehicle and pass it on to the new owner if you sell the vehicle. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company

1725845800 1725845800W

Index ....................................................... 4

Operating safety ................................. 14

At a glance ........................................... 19

System settings .................................. 41

Vehicle functions ................................ 49

Navigation ........................................... 59

Telephone .......................................... 123

Online and Internet functions .......... 157

Audio .................................................. 185

Video .................................................. 225

Rear Seat Entertainment System .... 235

SIRIUS Weather ................................ 257

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ... 360 camera

Displaying images ............................ 56 Switching on/off .............................. 56

911 emergency call .......................... 125

A Access data of the mobile phone network provider

Deleting ......................................... 165 Editing ........................................... 165 Making entries ............................... 162 Selecting ........................................ 161

Active partition (USB devices only) Selecting ........................................ 202

Address book Browsing ........................................ 147 Calling up ....................................... 147 Changing an entry .......................... 149 Connecting a call ........................... 150 Creating an entry ........................... 148 Deleting an entry ........................... 148 Deleting contacts ........................... 153 Details about an entry ................... 149 Entering characters ......................... 33 Entry as a home address ............... 103 Hiding contact details .................... 154 Importing contacts ........................ 152 Introduction ................................... 146 Receiving vCards ........................... 153 Searching for an entry ................... 148 Starting route guidance ................. 150 Voice tags ...................................... 151

Address entry menu ............................ 64 Adjusting the sound settings

Balance ............................................ 30 Alternative Route ................................ 93 Audio

Radio mode ................................... 186 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode

Switching to (Rear Seat Entertain- ment System) ................................ 245

Audio format, setting Video DVD ..................................... 231

Autostore ........................................... 189

AUX (audio) Notes/socket ................................ 223 Switching to ................................... 223

AUX (video) Setting the volume and sound ....... 232 Showing/hiding the menu ............. 232 Switching to ................................... 232

AUX jacks CD/DVD drive ............................... 238

Avoiding an area ................................ 115

B Back button ......................................... 27 Balance, adjusting ............................... 30 Bass, setting ........................................ 30 Bird's-eye view (navigation) ............. 109 Bluetooth

Activating audio mode ................... 215 Activating/deactivating ................... 45 Conditions (telephone) .................. 125 Connecting another mobile phone ............................................ 129 Connecting audio devices .............. 212 Device list ...................................... 212 Entering the passcode ................... 128 External authorization .................... 129 General information ......................... 44 Interface ........................................ 124 Introduction ................................... 124 Reconnecting an audio device ....... 214 Searching for a mobile phone ........ 127 Settings ........................................... 44 Telephone basic menu ................... 131 Telephony ...................................... 125 Telephony notes ............................ 124

Bluetooth audio basic display ....... 215 Brightness, setting (TV, video) ......... 226 Buttons on the COMAND control- ler .......................................................... 27

C Call

Accepting/ending/rejecting .......... 132 see Telephone

Call lists Displaying details ........................... 141

4 Index

Opening and selecting an entry ..... 140 Saving an entry in the address book .............................................. 141

Car pool lanes ...................................... 62 Category list (music search) ............ 204 CD

Copy protection ............................. 204 Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 200 General information ....................... 204 Inserting ........................................ 196 Inserting/loading (Rear Seat Entertainment System) .................. 244 Mode, switching to ........................ 197 Multisession .................................. 203 Notes on discs ............................... 204 Pause function ............................... 198 Removing/ejecting (Rear Seat Entertainment System) .................. 244 Safety notes .................................. 195 Selecting a media type .................. 198 Selecting a track ............................ 199 Sound settings (balance, bass, treble) .............................................. 30

CD mode Playback options ........................... 202

CD/DVD Inserting ........................................ 196 Removing ....................................... 196

Changing direction Announcement phase ...................... 88 Change-of-direction phase ............... 88 Preparation phase ............................ 88

Changing the character set ................ 36 Channel presets ................................ 188 Characters

Changing the character set .............. 35 Changing the language .................... 34 Deleting ........................................... 35 Entering ........................................... 35 Entering (address book, phone book) ............................................... 33 Entering (navigation) ........................ 35 Moving the cursor ............................ 35 Switching to letters .......................... 34

Clear button ......................................... 27 Color, setting (TV, video) .................. 226

COMAND Active multicontour seat .................. 52 Basic functions ................................ 29 Calling up drive status regulator (ABC) ............................................... 52 Display ............................................. 21 Examples of operation ..................... 27 Importing POIs ............................... 171 Menu overview ................................. 22 Multicontour seat ............................ 52 Seat functions .................................. 52 Settings ......................................... 183 Switching on/off .............................. 29

COMAND and Internet see Online and Internet functions

COMAND control panel ....................... 25 COMAND controller ............................. 26 COMAND display

Cleaning instructions ....................... 24 Setting ............................................. 42 Switching on/off .............................. 24

Compass function ............................. 117 Connecting a USB device ................. 197 Contacts

Deleting ......................................... 153 Importing ....................................... 152

Contrast, setting (TV, video) ............ 226 Copy protection (CD/DVD) ............... 204 Country-specific information (nav- igation) ............................................... 118

D Data carrier

MUSIC REGISTER ........................... 207 Data medium

CD/DVD ........................................ 204 MP3 ............................................... 202

Date format, setting ............................ 43 Day design, setting ............................. 42 Deleting

Call lists ......................................... 142 Destination

Assigning to an address book entry .............................................. 105

Destination (navigation) Displaying information ..................... 94 Entering a destination by address .... 63

Index 5

Entering a destination using the map ................................................. 71 Entering a point of interest .............. 76 Entering using geo-coordinates ....... 72 Entering using Mercedes-Benz Apps ................................................ 72 Saving ............................................ 104 Selecting from the destination memory ........................................... 70 Selecting from the list of last des- tinations ........................................... 70 Selecting storage options .............. 105 Storing after destination entry ....... 105 Storing during route guidance ....... 105

Destination memory (navigation) Deleting an entry ........................... 106 Entering/saving your home address ............................................ 69 Previous destinations .................... 107

Dialing a number (telephone) ........... 132 DISC button

Activating audio CD or MP3 mode .. 197 Activating Bluetooth Audio ......... 215 Switching on the Media Interface .. 219 Switching to the MUSIC REGIS- TER ................................................ 208

Display Selecting the design ........................ 42

Displaying the arrival time ................. 94 Displaying the distance to the des- tination ................................................. 94 Displaying the track and album ....... 201 Dolby Digital ..................................... 31 DVD

Copy protection ............................. 204 Inserting ........................................ 196 Inserting/loading (Rear Seat Entertainment System) .................. 244 Notes on discs ............................... 204 Removing/ejecting (Rear Seat Entertainment System) .................. 244 Sound settings (balance, bass, treble) .............................................. 30

DVD video Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 247

E Entering a street name ....................... 64 Entering an intersection name ........... 67 Entering the address (example) ......... 63 Entering the city .................................. 64 Entering the house number ................ 64 Entry

Deleting ........................................... 36 Storing ............................................. 34

Example display Audio CD mode .............................. 198 MUSIC REGISTER ........................... 207

F Factory setting (reset function) ......... 47 Fast forward

Audio mode (CD, MP3) .................. 200 Video DVD ..................................... 228

Fast rewind Audio mode (CD, MP3) .................. 200 Video DVD ..................................... 228

Favorites (Internet) ........................... 181 Favorites button .................................. 45 Frequencies

Adjusting for radio stations ............ 188 Fuel

Displaying consumption ................... 50

G Google Local Search

Importing a destination/route ....... 168 Popular Searches ........................... 169 Search ........................................... 167 Search history ............................... 169 Selecting a search position ............ 168 Using as the destination ................ 168

GPS reception ...................................... 60 Gracenote Media Database ........... 200

H Harman/kardon Logic 7 sur- round sound system

see Surround sound (harman/ kardon surround sound system)

Heading up (navigation) ................... 109

6 Index

Headphones Changing batteries ........................ 240

Highway information ........................ 112 Home address

Entering and storing ........................ 69 Selecting from the destination memory ........................................... 70

I Incident (traffic report) ....................... 99 Interface (USB, iPod)

see Media Interface Internet

Calling up the carousel view .......... 176 Conditions for access .................... 158 Creating favorites .......................... 181 Entering the URL ............................ 176 Favorites manager ......................... 181 Favorites menu .............................. 181 Menu functions .............................. 179 Opening favorites .......................... 180 Selecting favorites ......................... 177 Selecting/setting access data ....... 160

Internet radio Calling up ....................................... 175 Searching for stations .................... 175

iPod Alphabetic track selection ............. 221 Connecting to the Media Inter- face ............................................... 218 Selecting a category/playlist ......... 220

iTunes .............................................. 221

L Lane recommendations

Explanation ...................................... 89 Presentation .................................... 89

List of access data New provider ................................. 162

List of mobile phone network pro- viders

Empty ............................................ 160 With the selected provider ............. 161

Lumbar support Adjusting (COMAND) ....................... 53

M Map (navigation)

Adjusting the scale ........................ 108 Arrival time/distance to the des- tination .......................................... 111 City model ..................................... 112 Geo-coordinate display .................. 111 Heading ......................................... 109 Information in the display .............. 111 Map settings .................................. 109 Moving ........................................... 108 North orientation ........................... 109 Notes ............................................. 108 Point of interest symbols ............... 110 Road display .................................. 111 Saving the crosshair position ......... 108 Showing the map data version ....... 118 Topographical map ........................ 112 Updating ........................................ 118 Updating process ........................... 118

Media Interface Alphabetical track selection .......... 221 Basic menu .................................... 219 Connecting an external audio source ............................................ 218 Connection options ....................... 217 iPod ............................................ 217 Mode ............................................. 217 MP3 player .................................... 217 Notes for the MP3 player ............... 223 Playback options ........................... 222 Selecting a music file ..................... 219 Selecting category ......................... 220 Selecting folder ............................. 220 Selecting playlist ............................ 220 Switching to ................................... 218 USB mass storage device .............. 217

Media list ........................................... 198 Microphone, switching on/off ......... 134 Mobile phone

Authorizing .................................... 128 Connecting (Bluetooth inter- face) .............................................. 126 De-authorizing ............................... 130 External authorization .................... 129 Registering (authorizing) ................ 128

Index 7

Mobile phone network providers Calling up ....................................... 160

MP3 Bit/sampling rates ......................... 203 Copyright ....................................... 204 Data medium ................................. 202 Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 200 File systems ................................... 202 Formats ......................................... 203 Mode, switching to ........................ 197 Notes ............................................. 202 Pause function ............................... 198 Playback options ........................... 202 Safety notes .................................. 195 Selecting a media type .................. 198 Selecting a track ............................ 199 Sound settings (balance, bass, treble) .............................................. 30

Multifunction steering wheel Adjusting the volume ....................... 29

Multisession CD ................................ 203 Music files

Importing ....................................... 208 MUSIC REGISTER

Deleting all music files ................... 209 Deleting individual music files ....... 210 General notes ................................ 207 Memory space info ........................ 210 Playback options ........................... 211 Switching to ................................... 207

Music search ..................................... 204

N Navigation

Adjusting the volume of the navi- gation announcements .................... 29 Alternative route .............................. 93 Avoiding an area ............................ 114 Basic settings .................................. 62 Blocking a route section affected by a traffic jam ................................. 92 Compass function .......................... 117 Destination memory ...................... 103 Destination/route download ......... 170 Displaying destination informa- tion (arrival time, distance to des- tination) ........................................... 94

Entering a destination ...................... 63 Entering a destination by address .... 63 Entering a destination using the map ................................................. 71 Entering a point of interest .............. 76 Entering characters (character bar) .................................................. 35 Entering/saving your home address ............................................ 69 Freeway information ...................... 112 General notes .................................. 60 GPS reception .................................. 60 Important safety notes .................... 60 Lane recommendation ..................... 89 List of areas ................................... 115 Map settings .................................. 108 Off-road/off-map (off-road desti- nation) ............................................. 97 Previous destinations .................... 107 Reading out traffic reports ............. 102 Repeating announcements .............. 91 Route guidance ................................ 87 Search & Send ................................. 86 Selecting a destination from the destination memory ......................... 70 Selecting a destination from the list of last destinations ..................... 70 Selecting your home address ........... 70 Setting options for destination/ route download .............................. 173 Setting route options (avoiding: highways, toll roads, tunnels, fer- ries) ................................................. 62 Setting the route type (short route, fast route, dynamic route or economic route) ............................... 62 Showing/hiding the menu ............... 61 Starting route calculation ................ 69 Switching announcements on/ off .................................................... 91 Switching to ..................................... 61

Navigation announcements Switching off .................................... 29

Night View Assist Plus Showing the image on the COMAND display ............................. 56 Switching automatic activation on/off .............................................. 56

8 Index

North orientation (navigation) ......... 109

O Off-map ................................................ 98 Online and Internet functions

Ending the connection ................... 166 Establishing/ending the connec- tion ................................................ 166 Further Mercedes-Benz Apps ......... 174 Manually setting the access data of the mobile phone network pro- vider .............................................. 162 Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website ..... 174 Options menu ................................ 172 Resetting settings .......................... 174 Selecting options for the local search ............................................ 172 Selecting the access data of the mobile phone network provider ..... 161 Setting options for destination/ route download .............................. 173

Own address ...................................... 103

P Pause function

Audio mode (CD, MP3) .................. 198 Video DVD ..................................... 229

Personal POIs Acoustic notification ........................ 83 Calling up the menu ......................... 82 Displaying on the map ..................... 82 Managing categories ........................ 83 Saving .............................................. 84 Selecting as the destination ............. 85 Settings ........................................... 82 Visual information ............................ 83

Phone book Adding a number to an address book entry ..................................... 139 Calling up ....................................... 137 Creating a new entry ..................... 139 Deleting an entry ........................... 138 Entering characters ......................... 33 Searching for an entry ................... 137 Symbol overview ............................ 137

Phone call Dialing ........................................... 132

Picture settings (TV, video) .............. 226 Picture viewer

Displaying pictures ........................ 233 Introduction ................................... 232

Playback options Audio mode (CD, MP3) .................. 202

POI (navigation) Category .......................................... 79 Defining the position for the POI search .............................................. 78 Entering ........................................... 76 Entering a point of interest using the map ........................................... 81 List ................................................... 79 ZAGAT survey service ................... 81 see Personal POIs

POI icons Setting ........................................... 110

POI list With character bar ........................... 80

Previous destinations (navigation) .. 107

R Radio

Overview ........................................ 186 Setting a station ............................ 188 Sound settings (balance, bass, treble) .............................................. 30 Storing stations ............................. 188 Switching HD Radio on/off ............ 187 Switching on .................................. 186 Switching wavebands .................... 187

Read-aloud function .......................... 102 Reading out

Traffic reports on the route ............ 102 Real-time traffic reports ..................... 99 Rear Seat Entertainment System

Active COMAND source ................. 252 Adjusting sound settings ............... 242 Adjusting the brightness ................ 242 Adjusting the color ........................ 242 Adjusting the contrast ................... 242 AUX mode ...................................... 254 CD/DVD audio and MP3 mode ...... 244 Changing the batteries .................. 240

Index 9

Changing the picture format .......... 243 Cordless headphones .................... 239 Multiple users ................................ 242 Operating with the headphones ..... 241 Picture settings .............................. 242 System settings ............................. 243 Using the main loudspeaker .......... 241 Video DVD mode ........................... 247

Rear view camera Displaying the image ........................ 55

Rear-compartment screens .............. 237 Receiving vCards ............................... 153 Redialing (telephone) ........................ 133 Remote control

Button lighting ............................... 238 Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 237

Reset function ..................................... 47 Resetting (factory settings) ............... 47 Route

Estimated time of arrival .................. 94 Route (navigation)

Calling up the "Routes" menu .......... 96 Displaying the distance to the des- tination ............................................ 94 Recording ........................................ 95 Route overview ................................ 94 Selecting an alternative route .......... 93 Setting route options (avoiding: highways, toll roads, tunnels, fer- ries) ................................................. 62 Setting the route type (short route, fast route, dynamic route or economic route) ............................... 62 Starting calculation .......................... 69

Route demonstration .......................... 95 Route guidance

Canceling ......................................... 92 Continuing ....................................... 92 Destination reached ......................... 92 General notes .................................. 87 Lane recommendations ................... 89 Off-road ........................................... 97 Traffic reports .................................. 99

S Safety notes

Audio CD and MP3 mode ............... 195

Using the telephone ....................... 124 Video DVD mode ........................... 226

Satellite radio Displaying information ................... 195 Registering .................................... 191 Switching to ................................... 191

SatRadio Notes ............................................. 190 Selecting a category ...................... 192

Saving the crosshair position .......... 108 Screen

Selecting for the remote control .... 237 SD memory card

Ejecting .......................................... 196 Inserting ........................................ 196

Search & Send ...................................... 86 Seats

Active multicontour seat .................. 52 Adjusting the lumbar support (COMAND) ....................................... 53 Balance (seat heating) ..................... 54 Multicontour seat ............................ 52 Resetting settings ............................ 55 Seat functions (COMAND) ............... 52 Selecting for adjustment (COMAND) ....................................... 52

Selecting a province ........................... 64 Selecting a state .................................. 64 Selecting stations

Radio ............................................. 188 Sending DTMF tones ......................... 134 Setting the audio format

Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 251 Setting the language

COMAND ......................................... 45 Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 251

Setting the night design ..................... 42 Setting the text reader speed ............ 44 Setting the volume

Telephone calls ................................ 30 Video AUX ..................................... 232

Settings Menu overview ................................. 22 Picture (COMAND) ......................... 226 Sound settings ................................. 30

SIRIUS weather display 5-day forecast ................................ 259

10 Index

Daily forecast ................................. 258 Detail information .......................... 259 Information chart ........................... 258 Selecting a location for the weather forecast ............................ 259 Switching on/off ........................... 258 Weather map ................................. 262

Sound Switching on/off .............................. 29

Sound menu ......................................... 30 Sound mode ......................................... 32 Sound settings

Calling up the sound menu .............. 30 Surround sound ............................... 31 Treble and bass ............................... 30

Speed dial list Saving a phone book entry ............ 142

SPLITVIEW ............................................ 37 Station search ................................... 188 Stop function

Video DVD ..................................... 229 Storing stations

Radio ............................................. 188 Street View .......................................... 73 Surround sound ................................... 31 Surround sound (harman/ kardon surround sound system)

Notes ............................................... 31 Switching on/off .............................. 31

Switching between picture for- mats (TV, video) ................................. 226 Switching between summer time and standard time ............................... 43 Switching HD Radio on/off

see Radio Switching the hands-free micro- phone on/off ..................................... 134 Switching wavebands (radio) ........... 187 System settings

Bluetooth ...................................... 44 Date ................................................. 42 Language ......................................... 45 Text reader speed ............................ 44 Time ................................................. 42 Time zone ........................................ 43 Voice Control System ...................... 44

T Telephone

Accepting/ending a call ................ 132 Adjusting the volume for calls .......... 30 Calling (outgoing call) .................... 132 Calling via speed dial ..................... 133 Conference connection .................. 135 Connecting a mobile phone (gen- eral information) ............................ 126 De-authorizing a mobile phone ...... 130 Ending an active call ...................... 135 Entering a number ......................... 132 Entering phone numbers ................ 132 External authorization (Blue- tooth) .......................................... 129 Function restrictions ...................... 125 General notes ................................ 124 Incoming call ................................. 132 Making a call ................................. 135 Operating options .......................... 124 Overview of functions .................... 133 Reception and transmission vol- ume ............................................... 131 Redialing ........................................ 133 Rejecting a call .............................. 132 Rejecting/accepting a waiting call ................................................. 134 Safety notes .................................. 124 Sending DTMF tones ...................... 134 Single call ...................................... 133 Switching hands-free microphone on/off ............................................ 134 Text messages (SMS) .................... 144 Toggling ......................................... 135 Using the telephone ....................... 132 see Bluetooth

Telephone basic menu Bluetooth interface ..................... 131

Telephone number Entering ......................................... 132

Text messages (SMS) Calling the sender .......................... 145 Deleting ......................................... 146 Inbox .............................................. 144 Information and requirements ....... 144 Reading .......................................... 144 Reading aloud ................................ 145

Index 11

Storing sender in address book ..... 146 Storing the sender as a new address book entry ........................ 146

Time Setting ............................................. 44 Setting summer/standard time ....... 43 Setting the format ............................ 43 Setting the time ............................... 42 Setting the time manually ................ 42 Setting the time zone ....................... 43 Setting the time/date format .......... 43

Tone settings Balance and fader ............................ 30

Track Selecting (CD, MP3) ....................... 199 Selecting using the number key- pad ................................................ 199

Track information .............................. 247 Traffic jam function ............................. 92 Traffic reports

Calling up a list .............................. 100 Real-time traffic report .................. 101

Treble, adjusting (sound) .................... 30 True Image ........................................ 32 TV

Automatic picture shutoff .............. 226 Picture settings .............................. 226 Sound settings (balance, bass, treble) .............................................. 30

U Updating the digital map .................. 118 USB

see Media Interface

V Vehicle

Data acquisition ............................... 15 Video

see Video DVD Video AUX

Setting the picture ......................... 226 Video DVD

Automatic picture shutoff .............. 226 DVD menu ..................................... 230 Fast forward/rewind ...................... 228

Function restrictions ...................... 227 Interactive content ........................ 231 Notes on discs ............................... 227 Operation ....................................... 226 Pause function ............................... 229 Playing conditions .......................... 227 Safety notes .................................. 226 Selecting ........................................ 230 Selecting a film/title ...................... 229 Selecting a scene/chapter ............ 229 Setting the audio format ................ 231 Setting the language ...................... 231 Setting the picture ......................... 226 Showing/hiding the control menu ............................................. 228 Showing/hiding the menu ............. 228 Stop function ................................. 229 Subtitles ........................................ 231 Switching to ................................... 227

Voice Control System Settings ........................................... 44

Volume, adjusting COMAND ......................................... 29 Navigation messages ....................... 29

W Way points

Accepting for the route .................... 76 Creating ........................................... 73 Editing .............................................. 75 Entering ........................................... 73 Searching for a gas station when the fuel level is low .......................... 76

Weather Band Searching for a channel ................. 189 Switching on .................................. 189

Weather map (SIRIUS) Activating/deactivating display levels ............................................. 263 Calling up ....................................... 262 Legend ........................................... 267 Moving ........................................... 262 Showing/hiding the menu ............. 262 Time stamp .................................... 267

Weather memory (SIRIUS) Selecting an area ........................... 261 Storing an area .............................. 261

12 Index

Website Adding to favorites ........................ 180

Z ZAGAT rating service ........................ 81

Index 13

Important safety notes

G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other net- worked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as inten- ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- tronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and elec- tronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- tronics, the general operating permit is ren- dered invalid.

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating COMAND. COMAND calculates the route to the destina- tion without taking account of the following, for example: Rtraffic lights Rstop and yield signs Rmerging lanes Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no stopping zone

Rother road and traffic rules and regulations Rnarrow bridges COMAND can give incorrect navigation com- mands if the actual street/traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data. Digital maps do not cover all areas nor all routes in an area. For example, a routemay have been diverted or the direction of a one- way street may have changed. For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and reg- ulations always have priority over the sys- tem's driving recommendations. Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving. Please always use this feature instead of con- sulting the map display for directions. Look- ing at the icons or map display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h) your vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) per second. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio fre- quency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supple- ment C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 8 inches (20cm) and more between the radiator and a person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and legs.)

14 Operating safety

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves i USA only: The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause interfer- ence, and 2) These devices must accept any interfer- ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com- pliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

i Canada only: The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause interfer- ence, and 2) These devices must accept any interfer- ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Correct use

Observe the following informationwhen using COMAND: Rthe safety notes in this manual Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles

i Work improperly carried out on electronic components or systems (e.g. radio, DVD changer) and associated software could cause them to cease functioning. Even sys- tems that have not been modified could be affected because the electronic systems are connected. Electronic malfunctions can seriously jeopardize the operational safety of your vehicle.

i Roof antenna functionality (telephone, satellite radio, GPS) can be affected by the use of roof carrier systems. Attaching metalized retrofit film to the windshield may affect radio reception and have a negative impact on all other anten- nas (e.g. emergency antenna) in the vehicle interior.

i Therefore, have all work on or modifica- tions to electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. This workshop should have the necessary spe- cialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Protection against theft: this device is equipped with technical provisions to pro- tect it against theft. Further information on protection against theft can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Data stored in the vehicle

A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories. These data memories temporarily or perma- nently store technical information about: RThe vehicle's operating state RIncidents RMalfunctions In general, this technical information docu- ments the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. These include, for example: Roperating conditions of system compo- nents, e.g. fluid levels Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in

Operating safety 15

Z

movement, lateral acceleration, accelera- tor pedal position Rmalfunctions and defects in important sys- tem components, e.g. lights, brakes Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. air bag deployment, intervention of stability con- trol systems Rambient conditions, e.g. outside tempera- ture

This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in recognizing and rectifying mal- functions and defects Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci- dent Roptimize vehicle function The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor- mation can be read from the event datamem- ory and malfunction data memory. Services include, for example: Rrepair services Rservice processes Rwarranties Rquality assurance It is read by employees of the service network (including manufacturers) using special diag- nostic devices. More detailed information is obtained from it, if required. After a malfunction has been rectified, the information is deleted from the malfunction memory or is continually overwritten. When operating the vehicle, situations are conceivable in which this technical data, in connection with other information (if neces- sary, under consultation with an authorized expert), could be traced to a person. Examples include: Raccident reports Rdamage to the vehicle Rwitness statements

Further additional functions that have been contractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emergency.

Qualified specialist workshop

Read the information on qualified specialist workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Information on copyright

General information Information on licenses for free and Open Source software used in your vehicle and in the electronic components can be found on this website: http://www.mercedes- benz.com/opensource.

Registered trademarks Registered trademarks: RBluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc. RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. RBabySmart, ESP and PRE-SAFE are registered trademarks of Daimler AG. RHomeLink is a registered trademark of Prince. RiPod and iTunes are registered trade- marks of Apple Inc. RLogic7 is a registered trademark of Har- man International Industries. RMicrosoft and Windows media are reg- istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora- tion. RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc.

16 Operating safety

RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq- uity Digital Corporation. RGracenote is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGATSurvey and related brands are reg- istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.

Your COMAND equipment

This manual describes all standard and optional equipment available for your COMAND system at the time of purchase. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features descri- bed. This also applies to safety-relevant sys- tems and functions. Therefore, the equip- ment on your COMAND system may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Function restrictions

For safety reasons, some COMAND functions are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. You will notice this, for example because either you will not be able to select certain menu items or COMANDwill display a message to this effect.

Operating safety 17

Z

18

Your COMAND equipment .................. 20 COMAND operating system ............... 20 Using COMAND ................................... 28 Basic COMAND functions ................... 29 Character entry (telephony) ............... 33 Character entry (navigation) .............. 35 SPLITVIEW ........................................... 37

19

At a gl an ce

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described.

COMAND operating system

Overview

: COMAND display (Y page 21) ; COMAND control panel with a single DVD

drive = COMAND controller (Y page 26) You can use COMAND to operate the follow- ing main functions: Rthe navigation system Rthe audio function Rthe telephone function Rthe video function Rthe system settings Rthe online and Internet functions Rthe Digital Operator's Manual (available depending on the vehicle model)

You can call up the main functions: Rusing the corresponding buttons Rusing themain function bar in theCOMAND display Rusing the remote control

20 COMAND operating system At

a gl an ce

COMAND display

Display overview

Example display for radio : Status bar ; Calls up the audio menu = Main function bar ? Display/selection window A Radio menu bar Status bar: displays the time, the current mobile phone network provider and the signal level. The main functions navigation, audio, telephone and video feature additional menus. This is indicated by triangle;. The following table lists the available menu items. Main function bar= allows you to call up the desired main function. When the main function is activated, it is identifiable by the white lettering. In the example, the radio mode is switched on within the audio main function, display/selec- tion window? is active. Menu barA allows you to operate the radio functions.

COMAND operating system 21

At a gl an ce

Menu overview

Navi Audio Telephone Video System Symbol

Route settings FM/AM radio (using HD Radio)

Telephone Video DVD Calls up the system menu

Calls up the Digital Operator's Manual (available depending on the vehi- cle model)

Map settings Satellite radio

Address book

AUX Calls up COMAND and Internet

Personal POIs Disc Calls up the weather service SIR- IUS Weather

Messages (street name announcements, acoustic informa- tion during calls, audio fadeout, reserve fuel level)

Memory card

Calls up the Mercedes- Benz Mobile website

O Activates/ deactivates alter- native routes

MUSIC REGISTER

Avoids an area USB stor- age device

SIRIUS service Bluetooth Audio

Map version Media Inter- face

AUX

22 COMAND operating system At

a gl an ce

System menu overview

System Time SPLITVIEW Consump- tion

Seat Display off

Display settings O Switches the auto- matic time settings on/off

Operates COMAND functions from the passenger side

Calls up the fuel con- sumption display

Changes the driver/ front- passenger seat set- tings

Switches off the dis- play

Text reader speed Sets the time zone

Voice-operated control settings

Switches to summer time

Rear view camera Manual time setting

Language Sets the time/date format

Favorites button

Activates/deacti- vates Bluetooth

Automatic volume adjustment

Imports/exports data

Resets COMAND

i Delete your personal data using this func- tion, for example before selling your vehicle.

If equipped with the rear view camera: when the function is activated and COMAND is switched on, the image from the rear view camera is automatically shown in the COMAND display when reverse gear is engaged.

i If the 360 Cameramenu item is displayed, Display Off can be called up under System.

COMAND operating system 23

At a gl an ce

Switching the COMAND display on/off X Press the W button. or X Select System in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. In both cases, the system menu appears.

X To switch off: select Display Off and pressW to confirm.

X To switch on: press one of the buttons, e.g. W, or the% back button.

Cleaning instructions

! Do not touch the display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free cloth.

The display must be switched off and have cooled down before you start cleaning. Clean the display screen, when necessary, with a commercially available microfiber cloth and cleaning agent for TFT/LCD displays. Do not apply pressure to the display surface when cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible damage. Then, dry the surface with a dry microfiber cloth. Avoid using alcoholic thinners, gasoline or abrasive cleaning agents. These could dam- age the display surface.

24 COMAND operating system At

a gl an ce

COMAND control panel

Function Page

: Switches to radio mode 186 Switches wavebands 187 Switches to satellite radio 191

; Switches to navigation mode 61 Shows the menu system 61

= Press h repeatedly Switches to audio CD and MP3 mode 197 Switches to memory card mode 197 Switches to MUSIC REG- ISTER 207 Switches to USB storage device mode 197 Switches to Media Inter- face or audio AUX mode 218 Switches to Bluetooth audio mode 215

? Calls up the telephone basic menu: Telephony via the Blue- tooth interface 131

A Load/eject button 196

Function Page

B Selects stations via the sta- tion search function 188 Rewinds 200 Selects the previous track 199

C Disc slot To insert CDs/DVDs 196 To remove CDs/DVDs 196 Updates the digital map 118

D Selects stations via the sta- tion search function 188 Fast forward 200 Selects the next track 199

E Clear button Deletes characters 36 Deletes an entry 36

COMAND operating system 25

At a gl an ce

Function Page

F Number pad Selects stations via the station presets 188 Stores stations manually 188 Mobile phone authoriza- tion 128 Telephone number entry 132 Sends DTMF tones 134 Character entry 35 Selects a location for the weather forecast from the memory 261 z Displays the current track being played 201 g Selects stations by entering the frequency manually 188 g Selects a track 199

G Switches COMAND on/off 29 Adjusts the volume 29

Function Page

H SD memory card slot 196

I Calls up the system menu 42

J Accepts a call 132 Dials a number 132 Redial 133 Accepts a waiting call 134

K Switches the sound on or off 29 Switches the microphone on/off 134 Cancels the text message read-aloud function 145 Switches off navigation announcements 29

L Rejects a call 132 Ends an active call 135 Rejects a waiting call 134

COMAND controller

Overview

: COMAND controller You can use the COMAND controller to select the menu items in the COMAND display.

You can: Rcall up menus or lists Rscroll within menus or lists and Rexit menus or lists

Operation

Example: operating the COMAND controller

26 COMAND operating system At

a gl an ce

The COMAND controller can be: Rpressed briefly or pressed and heldW Rturned clockwise or counter-clockwise cVd

Rslid left or right XVY

Rslid forwards or backwards ZV

Rslid diagonally aVb

Example of operation In the instructions, operating sequences are described as follows: X Press the $ button. Radio mode is activated.

X Select Radio by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Confirm Station List by pressingW. The station list appears.

Buttons on the COMAND controller

Overview

: Back button (Y page 27) ; Clear button (Y page 27) = Seat function button (Y page 52) ? Favorites button (Y page 45) If your vehicle does not have the seat function button, it will have two Favorites buttons. For AMG vehicles: the COMAND controller is configured with the: and; buttons.

Back button You can use thek button to exit amenu or to call up the basic display of the current operating mode. X To exit the menu: briefly press the k back button. COMAND changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode.

X To call up the basic display: press and hold the k back button. COMAND changes to the basic display of the current operating mode.

Clear button X To delete individual characters: briefly press the 2 clear button.

X To delete an entire entry: press and hold the 2 clear button.

Seat function button You can use theT button to call up the following seat functions: RMulticontour seat (with 4-way lumbar sup- port) RActivemulticontour seat (dynamic seat and massage function) RBalance (seat heating distribution)

Favorites button You can assign predefined functions to the; favorites button and call them up by pressing the button (Y page 45).

COMAND operating system 27

At a gl an ce

Using COMAND

Selecting a main function

Address entry menu : Main function bar Situation: switching from navigation mode (address entry menu) to the system settings. X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination by slidingV and turning cV d the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Address Entry and pressW to confirm. The address entry menu appears.

X Slide Z V the COMAND controller and switch to main function bar:.

X Select System in the main function bar by turning cV d the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The system menu appears.

Selecting themenu of amain function

Example display for audio CD mode and audio menu (below) : Calls up the audio menu If one of the navigation, audio, telephone or video main functions is switched on, trian- gle: appears next to the entry in the main function bar. You can now select an associ- ated menu. The example describes how to call up the audio menu from audio CD mode (an audio CD is playing). X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The Audio menu appears. The # dot indicates the currently selected audio mode.

X Select another audio mode, e.g. Radio, by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Radio mode is activated.

28 Using COMAND At

a gl an ce

Selecting a menu item

X Select the station by turning c V d the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The station is set.

Basic COMAND functions

Switching COMAND on/off X Press the q control knob. When you switch on COMAND, a warning message will appear. COMAND calls up the previously selected menu. If you switch off COMAND, playback of the current audio or video source will also be switched off.

Switching the sound on or off

Audio/video source sound X Press the8 button on the COMAND controller or on the multifunction steering wheel. The sound from the respective audio or video source is switched on or off. i When the sound is switched off, you will see the, symbol in the status bar. If you change the audio or video source or change the volume, the sound is automatically switched on.

i Even if the sound is switched off, you will still hear navigation system announce- ments.

Switching off navigation announce- ments X Navigation announcements: press the 8 button during the announcement.

Switching navigation announcements back on X Press the8 button again. The navigation announcements are active again: Rif COMAND is switched off/on with the

q control knob Ror after starting route guidance

Adjusting the volume

Adjusting the volume for the audio or video source X Turn the q control knob. or X Press theW orX button on the mul- tifunction steering wheel. The volume of the currently selected audio or video source changes.

You can also adjust the volume for the fol- lowing: RNavigation announcements RPhone calls RVoice output of the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions)

Adjusting the volume for navigation announcements During a navigation announcement: X Turn the q control knob. or X Press theW orX button on the mul- tifunction steering wheel.

Basic COMAND functions 29

At a gl an ce

Adjusting the volume for phone calls You can adjust the volume for hands-free mode during a telephone call. X Turn the q control knob. or X Press theW orX button on the mul- tifunction steering wheel.

Adjusting the sound settings

Calling up the sound menu

You can make various sound settings for the different audio and video sources. Thismeans that it is possible to set more bass for radio mode than for audio CD mode, for example. You can call up the respective sound menu from the menu of the desired mode. The example describes how to call up the sound menu in radio mode. X Press the $ button. The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last waveband.

X Select Sound by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You can now set the treble, bass and bal- ance for radio mode.

Adjusting treble and bass

Setting the bass X Select Treble or Bass in the sound menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. An adjustment scale appears.

X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The setting is saved.

Adjusting balance and fader

Setting the balance

With the balance function, you can control whether the sound is louder on the driver's or front-passenger side. The fader function is used to control whether the sound is louder in the front or the rear of the vehicle. You can adjust the fader depending on the vehicle model.

30 Basic COMAND functions At

a gl an ce

Equipped with Bang & Olufsen sound sys- tem: for the best sound focus, choose the setting 0. X Select Bal/Fad (balance/fader) in the sound menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select a balance setting by sliding XVY the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

Surround

General notes If your vehicle is equipped with surround sound, you can use one of two sound sys- tems: Rharman/kardon Logic 7 surround sound system The harman/kardonLogic 7 surround sound system allows you to set the opti- mum surround sound in the vehicle interior (Y page 31). RBang & Olufsen sound system (Y page 32)

Both sound systems are available for the fol- lowing operating modes: Rradio (FM only) Rsatellite radio Raudio CD RMP3 (including SD memory card and USB storage device) RMedia Interface RBluetooth audio mode Rvideo DVD (PCM, dts and Dolby Digital audio formats) RAUX Because some DVDs contain both stereo and multichannel audio formats, it may be neces- sary to set the audio format (Y page 231). Discs which support the audio formats men- tioned have the following logos:

harman/kardon Logic 7 surround sound system

Basic COMAND functions 31

At a gl an ce

The example describes how to set the sur- round sound for radio mode. X To switch surround sound on/off: press the $ button. The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last waveband.

X Select Sound by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Surround and pressW to confirm. X Select Logic7 On or Logic7 Off by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Depending on your selection, surround sound is switched on or off and the menu is exited.

X To exit the menu without saving: press the k back button or slide XVY the COMAND controller. i Please note the following: for the opti- mum audio experience for all passengers when Logic7 is switched on, the balance should be set to the center of the vehicle interior. You will achieve the best sound results by playing video DVD media. MP3 tracks should have a bit rate of at least 128 kbit/s. Surround sound playback does not func- tion for mono signal sources, such as for AM radio mode. If radio reception is poor, e.g. in a tunnel, you should switch off Logic7, since it may otherwise switch dynamically between stereo and mono and cause temporary sound distortions. On some stereo recordings, the sound characteristics may differ from conven- tional stereo playback.

i The Logic7 On function creates a sur- round sound experience for every passenger when playing stereo recordings, for example. It enables optimum playback of music and films on CD or video DVD with

multichannel audio formats, such as MLP, dts or Dolby Digital. This results in sound characteristics like those intended by the sound engineer when the original was recorded.

i If you select Logic7 Off, the sound sys- tem plays the tracks as stored on the medium. Due to the design of the passenger compartment, an optimum audio experience cannot be guaranteed for all passengers.

Bang & Olufsen sound system

You can optimize the sound in the vehiclewith the Bang & Olufsen sound system and the True Imagesound technology. The Sound Mode function enables you to focus the selec- ted sound setting within the vehicle. The example describes how to set the opti- mum sound for radio mode. Selecting the sound setting for True Image X Press a number key, such as $. X Select Sound by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Bang&Olufsen and pressW to con- firm. Amenu appears. A# dot marks the current setting for True Image.

X Select reference or surround and press W to confirm. Rreference

32 Basic COMAND functions At

a gl an ce

This setting provides a crisp, clear, luxury high-end sound setting for a studio atmos- phere in your vehicle. Rsurround This setting enables a wide-ranging sound experience for playing music and videos.

: Current position of the sound setting For the optimummusical enjoyment, you can focus the sound image precisely on one seat. This means you are right at the center of the listening experience, with all system param- eters being precisely calculated for the selec- ted position. The result is authentic music reproduction inside the vehicle. Focusing the sound setting X Press the $ button. X Select Sound by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Bang&Olufsen and pressW to con- firm. Amenu appears. A# dot marks the current setting for Sound Mode.

Depending on the vehicle model series X Select left, all or rear and pressW to confirm.

or X Select left, all or right and pressW to confirm.

X To exit the menu: press the k back button or slide XVY the COMAND control- ler.

i Please note the following: youwill achieve the best sound results on your Bang & Oluf- sen sound system by playing high-quality CDs. MP3 tracks should have a bit rate of at least 224 kbit/s. When playing using an iPod, the bit rate should also be at least 224 kbit/s. For optimum playback quality: X Deactivate the EQ setting on the iPod.

Surround-sound playback does not func- tion for mono signal sources, such as the medium wave range (MW) in radio mode. On some stereo recordings, the sound characteristics may differ from conven- tional stereo playback.

Character entry (telephony)

Example: entering characters

:* Switches the character bar to upper- case/lowercase letters

; p Switches the character bar from uppercase/lowercase letters to dig- its

=B Changes the language of the char- acter bar

? 2 Deletes a character/an entry The example describes how to enter the sur- name Schulz.

Character entry (telephony) 33

At a gl an ce

X Call up the input menu with data fields (Y page 139).

X Select S and confirmW with the COMAND controller. S appears in the data field.

X Select c and confirmW with the COMAND controller. The letter c is added to S in the data field.

X Repeat the process until the name has been entered in full.

Other input menu functions: RDeleting a character/an entry (Y page 35) RSwitching between upper/lower-case let- ters (Y page 34) RChanging the character set (Y page 35) RMoving the cursor to the next data field (Y page 35)

X To enter a phone number: select the dig- its one by one in the corresponding data field by turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

Switching data fields

: Cursor in the next data field ; Stores the entry = 4 and5 symbols to select a data field In the input menu, if you want to enter a first name after you have entered a surname, for example, proceed as follows to switch between the data fields:

Option 1 X Select4 or5 in the character bar and pressW to confirm. The input menu shows the data field selec- ted.

Option 2 X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeat- edly until the character bar disappears.

X Select the data field by sliding ZV and pressW to confirm.

Storing the entry X After making an entry in the input menu, e.g. to create a new entry(Y page 139): select the sym- bol in the character bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The entry is stored in the address book.

Further functions available in the character bar

Changing the language of the character bar While making an entry in the input menu (Y page 139): X SelectB and pressW to confirm. X Select a language by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

Switching the character bar to letters While making an entry in the input menu, e.g. to create a new entry (Y page 139): X Select the* (upper case) orE (lower case) symbol and pressW to con- firm.

34 Character entry (telephony) At

a gl an ce

Changing the character set While making an entry in the input menu (Y page 139): X Select the p symbol and pressW to confirm. RABC (upper/lower case) R123 (digits) ROther (special characters such as @, , etc.)

Moving the cursor to the next data field

: Cursor (repositioned) ; 2 and3 symbol to reposition the cur-

sor While making an entry in the input menu (Y page 139): X Select the2 or3 symbol and pressW to confirm.

Deleting a character/an entry

While making an entry in the input menu (Y page 139): X To delete characters: press the$ but- ton on the control panel.

or X Select the 2 symbol by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

or X Press the 2 button next to the COMAND controller.

X To delete an entry: press and hold the $ button on the control panel until the entire entry has been deleted.

or X Select the 2 symbol and press and hold W the COMAND controller until the entire entry has been deleted.

or X Press and hold the 2 button next to the COMAND controller until the entire entry is deleted.

Character entry (navigation)

General information The following paragraphs describe how to enter characters using city input for NEW YORK as an example. If you want to use the address entry menu to enter a city, a street or a house number, for example, COMAND offers you: Ra list with a character bar (option 1) Ra selection list (option 2) You can enter the characters using either the character bar or the number keypad. In the selection list, you select an entry to copy it to the address entry menu.

Option 1: city list/street list with character bar X Call up the city list with character bar (Y page 64). The alphabetically sorted city list shows the first available entries.

Character entry (navigation) 35

At a gl an ce

: Character N entered by the user ; Characters automatically added by

COMAND ANTICOKE = List entry that most closely resembles the

current entry by the user ? Switches to the selection list A Deletes an entry B Characters not currently available C Characters currently available D Currently selected character E Character bar F Cancels an entry G List Entering characters using the character bar X Select N by turning c V d the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. ListG shows all available city names beginningwith N. The list entrymost closely resembling user's current entry= is always highlighted at the top of the list (NANTICOKE in the example). All characters currently entered by the user are shown in black (letter N: in the exam- ple). Letters added by COMAND are shown in gray; (ANTICOKE in the example). Character barE shows the letters still available for selection in blackC. These can be selected. In the example, the letter O is highlightedD. The characters available depend on the entrymade by the user so far and the data contained in the digital map. Characters that are no longer availableB are shown in gray.

X Select E, W, space, Y in order and confirm each withW.

Entering characters using the number keypad X To enter the letter N: press thep num- ber key twice in quick succession. The character appears at the bottom of the display when the key is pressed. The first available letter is highlighted. You see which characters you can enter with that key. Each time the key is pressed, the next character is selected. Example:p key: Rpress once = M Rpress twice = N Rpress three times = O

X Wait until the character display goes out. The entries matching your input are shown in the list.

X Enter E, W, space, Y with the corresponding keys. i The space is entered using number key 9.

Further functions in the list with char- acter bar X To delete characters: press the$ but- ton on the control panel.

or X Press the 2 button next to the COMAND controller.

36 Character entry (navigation) At

a gl an ce

or X Select the2 symbol in the character bar by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X To delete an entry: press and hold the $ button on the control panel.

or X Press and hold the 2 button next to the COMAND controller until the entire entry is deleted.

or X Select the2 symbol in the character bar and press and holdW the COMAND con- troller until the entire entry is deleted.

X To cancel an entry: select the& symbol in the bottom left of the character bar and pressW to confirm.

or X Press the k back button. The address entry menu appears.

X To accept the first list entry: press and holdW the COMAND controller until the address entry menu appears. The accepted list entry is shown there.

Calling up the list as a selection list You can switch from the list of cities with the character bar to the list of cities as a selection list at any point during character entry. X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeat- edly until the city list appears as a selection list. Select the desired city from the selection list.

or X Selectin the character bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

If there are several entries for a city or if sev- eral cities of the same name are stored, then is highlighted in the character bar. X PressW the COMAND controller.

Option 2: city list as selection list

COMANDeither shows the selection list auto- matically or you can call up the selection list from the list with the character bar. The example shows the selection list after the city NEW YORK has been entered. The entry is highlighted automatically. X Confirm NEW YORK by pressingW the COMAND controller. The address entry menu appears. You can now enter a street, for example.

Observe the information on destination entry (Y page 63).

SPLITVIEW

Method of operation SPLITVIEW allows you to simultaneously use different COMAND functions on the front- passenger side and on the driver's side. Dif- ferent content is seen depending on your per- spective when viewing the display. The "Navi" function, for example, can be used from the driver's sidewhile a video is watched from the front-passenger side. SPLITVIEW is operated with the remote con- trol from the front-passenger side.

SPLITVIEW 37

At a gl an ce

To do so, use the special cordless head- phones (Y page 239). Using the headphones on the correct sides ensures an optimal sound. You can connect your own headphones to a special headphones jack. You can use the remote control to operate them.

Points to remember RYou can only adjust the volume for the headphones supplied, directly on the head- phones. ROnly entertainment functions, i.e. audio, TV, video and Internet, for example, may be used with SPLITVIEW. RDifferent media can be used on the driver and front-passenger sides as long as they use different media sources. Example: if a medium from the single DVD drive is being played on the driver's side, then another medium that is also played from the single DVD drive cannot be played separately on the front-passenger side. However, other media can be used at the same time on the front-passenger side, including radio, memory card, MUSIC REGISTER, Media Interface, USB or AUX. RIf you use the same medium on both sides, you can both carry out the respective set- tings. RInternet use is only available at any one time to the driver or the front passenger. A corresponding message appears on the display. RInternet can only be used, if it is set and connected via a telephone on the driver's side. RThe multifunction steering wheel can only be used for functions which relate to the driver's side.

Switching SPLITVIEW on/off

Switching on SPLITVIEW X Select System in the main function bar by turning cV d the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select; in the menu bar and confirm. SPLITVIEW symbol: appears in the dis- play and display; switches to Off. The front passenger sees the display of the function last activated. If the switch-on time was longer than 30 minutes previ- ously, the display from the driver's side is shown. The front passenger can now call up the COMAND functions with the remote con- trol.

Switching off SPLITVIEW X Select; in the menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. SPLITVIEW symbol: disappears from the display. Display; switches to On. i If COMAND has already been switched on, you can also use the remote control to switch SPLITVIEW on and off. Make sure that the SPLITVIEW symbol is set on the remote control thumbwheel (Y page 237).

The SPLITVIEWdisplay remains on for approx- imately 30 minutes after the SmartKey has been turned to position 0 in the ignition lock. After this time or after the SmartKey has been removed, the settings on the front-passenger side are saved for approximately 30 minutes

38 SPLITVIEW At

a gl an ce

longer. After this period, reactivation on the front-passenger side means that the settings from the driver's side will be used.

Transferring the driver's website X To switch on SPLITVIEW: select System from the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select; in the menu bar and confirm. SPLITVIEW symbol: appears in the dis- play, and display; switches to Off.

X Select in the main function bar with the remote control. A menu appears with the following options: ROperator's Manual REnter URL RInternet Favorites RMercedes-Benz Apps RInternet Radio RMercedes Mobile Website RTransfer Driver's Website

X Select Transfer Driver's Websitewith the remote control. You see the last website called up by the driver.

Transferring a destination to the driver Using SPLITVIEW you can select a destination from the front-passenger side and transfer this to the driver's side. X To switch on SPLITVIEW: select Settings from the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select; in the menu bar and confirm. SPLITVIEW symbol: appears in the dis- play, and display; switches to Off.

X Select in the main function bar with the remote control. A menu appears.

X Select Mercedes-Benz Apps with the remote control. You see the selection of Mercedes-Benz Apps.

X Select Google Local Search with the remote control. Using a menu you can select a category for the destination.

X Select At Current Position, for exam- ple. Using a menu you can determine the type of search inquiry.

X Select Enter Search Term:, for example. An input field appears.

X Enter the destination with the remote con- trol and confirm the entry withb. You see the results list from Google.

X Select the exact destination with the remote control. An additional menu appears.

X Select Navigate to. X A window appears on the driver's side with the message: Accept the navigation data from Mercedes-Benz Apps?

SPLITVIEW 39

At a gl an ce

40

Your COMAND equipment .................. 42 Display settings .................................. 42 Time settings ....................................... 42 Text reader settings ............................ 44 Voice Control System settings .......... 44 Bluetooth settings ............................ 44 Setting the system language ............. 45 Assigning a favorites button .............. 45 Importing/exporting data .................. 46 Reset function ..................................... 47

41

Sy st em

se tt in gs

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described.

Display settings

Setting the brightness The brightness detected by the display light sensor affects the setting options for this function.

X Press W. X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Display and pressW to confirm. X Select Brightness and pressW to con- firm.

X Adjust the brightness by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

Display design Your COMAND display features optimized designs for operation during daytime and night-time hours. You can customize the design by manually selecting day or night design, or opt for an automatic setting.

X Press W. X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Display and pressW to confirm. X Select Day Mode, Night Mode or Auto matic by turning cVd the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm. A dot indicates the current setting.

Design Explanation

Day Mode The display is set perma- nently to day design.

Night Mode The display is set perma- nently to night design.

Automatic If the Automatic setting is selected, COMAND evaluates the readings from the automatic vehi- cle light sensor and auto- matically switches between the display designs.

Time settings

General information If COMAND is equipped with a navigation sys- tem and has GPS reception, COMAND auto- matically sets the time and date. You can change the time in minute increments. The date can also be changed.

i If you adjust the time in minute incre- ments, any time zone settings and settings for changing between summer and stand- ard time are lost. Switching between sum- mer and standard time (Y page 43).

42 Time settings Sy st em

se tt in gs

i The following navigation system functions require the time, time zone and summer/ standard time to be set correctly in order to work properly: Rroute guidance on routes with time- dependent traffic guidance Rcalculation of expected time of arrival

i With this function, you can set the time for every display in the vehicle.

Setting the time/date format X Press the W button. X Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Format and pressW to confirm. The # symbols show the current settings.

X Set the format by turning c V d the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

Abbreviation Meaning

DD . MM . YY Day . Month . Year (date format, two digits)

MM / DD / YYYY Month/Day/Year date format, year (all four digits)

YY / MM / DD Year/Month/Day date format, year (two digits)

HH : MM (24 hrs)

Hours : Minutes (24 hour time format)

HH : MM (AM/PM) Hours : Minutes (AM/PM time format)

Adjusting the time zone and switching to Daylight Savings Time (Summer) X Press W.

X Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Time Zone and pressW to confirm. A list of countries or time zones appears. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the country or time zone by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A time zone list may also be displayed, depending on the country selected.

X Select the time zone and pressW to con- firm. The entry for the Automatic Time Set tings is accepted.

Subsequent operation depends on whether the automatic changeover function to sum- mer time is available. X To changemanually: select ON or OFF and pressW to confirm.

X To change to automatic time: select Automatic and pressW to confirm. The entry for the Automatic Time Set tings is accepted.

X To switch the automatic time setting off/on: press the W button.

X Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X PressW to confirm the Automatic Time Settings. Switch the automatic time setting off or on again O. To switch on: the menu item is switched on as the default setting. If the Automatic Time Settings is switched off and you switch it on again, the last settings for the time zone and summer time changeover are selected. To switch off: the time zone is deselected and the summer time is switched off. If Automatic is set for the summer time changeover, a prompt will appear asking whether this should be maintained.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

Time settings 43

Sy st em

se tt in gs

Setting the time manually

X Press the W button. X Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Set Time Manually and pressW to confirm.

X Set the time by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The time is accepted.

Text reader settings

X Press the W button. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Text Reader Speed and pressW to confirm. A list appears. The # dot indicates the cur- rent setting.

X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

Voice Control System settings

Opening/closing the help window The helpwindowprovides information in addi- tion to the audible instructions during indi- vidualization and during the subsequent voice control.

X Press W. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Voice Control and pressW to confirm.

X Select Help Window and pressW to con- firm. You have switched the help window on O or off .

Individualization Using individualization, you can fine-tune the Voice Control System to your own voice and thus improve voice recognition. See the sep- arate operating instructions.

Bluetooth settings

General information about Blue- tooth

Bluetooth-capable devices, e.g. mobile phones, have to comply with a certain profile in order to be connected to COMAND. Every Bluetooth device has its own specific Blue- tooth name. Bluetooth technology is a standard for short-rangewireless data transmissions up to approximately 10 meters. Bluetooth allows, for example, the exchange of vCards.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.

44 Bluetooth settings Sy st em

se tt in gs

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth

X Press W. The system menu appears.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Activate Bluetooth and pressW to confirm. This switches Bluetooth on O or off .

Setting the system language

This function allows you to determine the lan- guage for the menu displays and the naviga- tion announcements. The selected language affects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not avail- able in all languages. If a language is not avail- able, the navigation announcements will be in English. When you set the system language, the lan- guage of the Voice Control System will change accordingly. If the selected language is not supported by the Voice Control System, English will be selected. X Press the W button. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Language and pressW to confirm. The list of languages appears. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the language by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. COMAND loads the selected language and sets it.

Assigning a favorites button

X To assign a favorites button: press the W button.

X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Assign as Favorite and pressW to confirm. The list of predefined functions appears. The dot # indicates the currently selected function.

X Select the function by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The favorites button is assigned the selec- ted function.

X Example: to call up a favorite: press the g favorites button. This calls up the predefined function.

You can select the following predefined func- tions in a menu: RSplitView on/off: you can switch the screen view for the front passenger on or off. RDisplay On/Off: you can switch the dis- play off or on. RFull Screen: 'Clock': you can call up the full screen with the clock. R Menu: you can call up the online and Internet functions. R360 Camera: you can call up the picture of the 360 camera. RFull screen: 'Map': you can call up the full screen with the map. RSpoken Driving Tip: you can call up the current driving recommendation. RDisplay Traffic Messages: you can call up traffic reports. RNavigate Home: you can start route guid- ance to your home address if you have already entered and saved the address (Y page 69).

Assigning a favorites button 45

Sy st em

se tt in gs

RDetour Menu: you can call up the Detour menu and then block a section of the route and recalculate the route (Y page 92). RCompass Screen: you can call up the com- pass.

Importing/exporting data

General notes ! Never remove the stick or card when writ- ing data to the USB stick or the memory card. You may otherwise lose data.

Using this function, you can: Rtransfer your personal COMAND data from one system/vehicle to another. Rmake a backup copy of your personal data (export data) and load it again (import data). Rprotect your data from unwanted export by activating a pin prompt (presetting: deacti- vated ).

You can either use an SD memory card or a USB storage device (e.g. a USB stick) as tem- porary storage.

Activating/deactivating PIN protec- tion

X Press the W button. The system menu appears.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Import/Export Data and pressW to confirm.

X Select Activate PIN Protection and pressW to confirm. Activate O or deactivate PIN protec- tion. When activating PIN protection, you will be prompted to enter a PIN.

X Enter a 4-digit PIN, selectand pressW to confirm. You will be prompted to enter the PIN again.

X Re-enter the PIN, select and pressW to confirm. The PIN prompt nowprotects your personal data from unwanted export.

i If you deactivate your PIN protection, you will first be prompted to enter your PIN. If you have forgotten your PIN, a Mercedes- Benz service station can deactivate your PIN protection for you. Alternatively, you can deactivate PIN protection by resetting your personal COMAND data (Y page 47).

46 Importing/exporting data Sy st em

se tt in gs

Importing/exporting data

X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196). or X Connect a USB device (e.g. a USB memory stick) (Y page 197).

X Press W. The system menu appears.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Import/Export Data and pressW to confirm.

X Select Import Data or Export Data and pressW to confirm.

If PIN protection is activated, a PIN prompt appears when you select Export Data. X Enter the PIN, selectand pressW to confirm. You can now proceed in the same way as if PIN protection was deactivated.

X To select a preset: select Memory Card or USB Storage and pressW to confirm.

X Select All Data and pressW to confirm. This function exports all the data to the selected disc.

or X Select the data type and pressW to con- firm. Depending on the previous entry, select the data type for the export O or not .

X Select Cont. and pressW to confirm.

i Personal music files in the MUSIC REGIS- TER cannot be saved and imported again using this function.

Reset function

You can completely reset COMAND to the factory settings. Amongst other things, this will delete all personal COMAND data. This includes the station presets, entries in the destinationmemory and in the list of previous destinations in the navigation system and address book entries. In addition, any activa- ted PIN protection, which you have used to protect your data against unwanted export, will be deactivated. Resetting is recommen-

Reset function 47

Sy st em

se tt in gs

ded before selling or transferring ownership of your vehicle, for example. Data on the internal hard drive, e.g. music files in the MUSIC REGISTER, will be deleted. You can also delete music files from the MUSIC REGISTER using the "Delete all music files" function (Y page 209). X Press the W function button. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Reset and pressW to confirm. A warning message appears asking whether you wish to reset.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, a promptwill appear again asking whether you really wish to reset to the factory settings.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, a message will be shown. COMAND is reset and restarted. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

48 Reset function Sy st em

se tt in gs

Your COMAND equipment .................. 50 Climate control status display ........... 50 Fuel consumption indicator ............... 50 ON&OFFROAD display ......................... 51 Driving conditions menu (Active Body Control) ....................................... 51 Seat functions ..................................... 52 Rear view camera ............................... 55 Night View Assist Plus ....................... 56 360 camera ....................................... 56

49

Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described.

Climate control status display

The climate status display in the COMAND display (example)

If you change the settings of the climate con- trol system, the climate status display appears for three seconds at the bottom of the screen in the COMAND display. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions. Overview of climate control systems, see the separate vehicle operating instructions. The climate status display appears when: X You turn the temperature control and set the temperature.

or X You turn the control to set the airflow. or X You press one of the following buttons: K Increases air flow I Decreases air flow Switches climate control on/off Switches the ZONE function on/off

Controls the air conditioning auto- matically Sets the climate control style in auto- matic mode (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE) _ Sets the air distribution M,P orO Sets the air distribu- tion Turns on the defrost function Turns on maximum cooling i The way that the climate control status display is called up depends on your vehi- cle's climate control system.

Example settings for the defrost function (top) and for the climate mode in automatic mode X To hide the display: turn or press the COMAND controller.

or X Press one of the buttons on COMAND.

Fuel consumption indicator

Overview Depending on the vehicle equipment and the engine variant installed, fuel consumption can be shown in the COMAND display. If your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle and the installed engine variant supports it, you can call up other displays (see the separate oper- ating instructions).

50 Fuel consumption indicator Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

Calling up/exiting the display

X To call up the full screen display: press the W button.

X In the system menu, slide ZV the COMAND controller up until the Full Screen option is selected.

X PressW the COMAND controller. The system display is shown as full screen (without system menu).

X Slide XVY the COMAND controller repeat- edly until the fuel consumption indicator appears. The COMAND display shows the fuel con- sumption for the last 15 minutes of the journey.

X To exit the full-screen display: pressW the COMAND controller. The system menu appears.

Every bar of the graph displays the average value for one minute. The fuel consumption display may differ from the display in the FROM START trip computer in the Tripmenu; see the vehicle Operator's Manual.

ON&OFFROAD display

Overview Depending on the vehicle model series, the settings and the status of the ON&OFFROAD functions can be shown in the COMAND dis- play, e.g.: Rvehicle's angle of inclination Ruphill or downhill gradient in percentage Rsteering angle Further information on the ON&OFFROAD functions can be found in the vehicle Opera- tor's Manual.

Calling up displays X Press W. X In the system menu, slide ZV the COMAND controller up until the display/ selection window is selected.

X Slide XVY the COMAND controller until the ON&OFFROAD display appears. The COMAND display shows the settings and status of the ON&OFFROAD functions.

Exiting the display X Slide XVY the COMAND controller until the desired display (clock or fuel consump- tion) is shown.

Driving conditions menu (Active Body Control)

General notes On vehicles with Active Body Control (ABC), you can display some driving systems and additional information in the COMAND dis- play.

Driving conditions menu (Active Body Control) 51

Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

Callingupdrive status regulator (ABC) X Press W. X In the system menu, slide ZV the COMAND controller up until the display/ selection window is selected.

X Slide XVY the COMAND controller repeat- edly until the driving conditions menu (ABC) appears. The corresponding displays appear in the COMAND display.

Details on the displays: Rfor all vehicles except AMG vehicles, see the separate vehicle Operator's Manual Rfor AMG vehicles, see the separate vehicle Operator's Manual.

Exiting the display X Slide XVY the COMAND controller until the desired display (clock or fuel consump- tion) is shown.

Seat functions

Overview Using theT button next to the COMAND controller or the Seat menu item in the sys- tem menu, you can call up different setting functions. The following settings depend on the type of seat and the vehicle model series: RSeat cushion length RBackrest side bolsters RLumbar RBalance RSeat cushion side bolsters RDynamics RMassage

i You can also store and recall the current seat function settings using the memory button and the corresponding memory position switch; see the separate vehicle Operator's Manual.

The massage function cannot be started or stopped using the memory button.

Selecting the seat

First select the seat which you wish to adjust. This function is not available for all vehicles. X Press theT or W button. X Select Seat and pressW to confirm. X To switch to the lower line, for both options slideV the COMAND controller.

X Select Driver's Seat or Passenger Seat by turning cVd the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm.

Adjustment functions

Adjusting the seat cushion length The availability of this function depends on the type of seat and the vehicle model series.

This function allows you to adjust the height of the seat cushion.

52 Seat functions Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

X Select the seat (Y page 52). X Select Seat Surface by turning cVd the COMAND Controller and pressW to con- firm. A scale appears.

X Turn cVd or slide ZV the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm.

X To exit the menu: press the k back button.

Adjusting the seat contour in the lum- bar region of the seat backrest The availability of this function depends on the type of seat and the vehicle model series.

This function allows you to adjust the air cushions in the lumbar region of the backrest (4-way lumbar support). X Select the seat (Y page 52). X Select Lumbar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. A crosshair appears. You can make two settings: RVertical: to move the point of greatest lumbar support up or down RHorizontal: to adjust the amount of sup- port

X Slide ZV or XVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X To exit the menu: press the k back button.

Adjusting the sides of the seat backrest (backrest side bolsters) The availability of this function depends on the type of seat and the vehicle model series.

X Select the seat (Y page 52). X Select Seatb. Sides by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. A scale appears.

X Turn cVd or slide ZV the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm.

X To exit the menu: press the k back button.

i For vehicle model series with a dynamic multicontour seat: if the driving dynamics are activated and respond to a change of direction (e.g. when cornering), the back- rest side bolsters cannot be temporarily adjusted.

Adjusting the seat side bolsters The availability of this function depends on the type of seat and the vehicle model series.

Seat functions 53

Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

This function allows you to adjust the air cushions in the seat side bolsters. X Select the seat (Y page 52). X Select Seat Sides by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. A scale appears.

X Turn cVd or slide ZV the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm.

X To exit the menu: press the k back button.

Balance The availability of this function depends on the vehicle model series.

The Balance function controls the distribution of heat on the seat backrest and cushion. The Balance function influences the currently set heating level of the seat heating; see the separate vehicle Operator's Manual. X Select the seat (Y page 52). X Select Balance by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. A scale appears and shows the current set- ting. Positive values indicate the heat out- put for the seat backrest, negative values indicate the heat output for the seat cush- ion. The intensity is indicated by an orange bar in the stylized seat above the scale.

The values stand for: R0 - backrest and seat cushion are heated equally to the maximum level R1 to 3 - the heat output to the seat cush- ion is reduced in one-third increments R-1 to -3 - the heat output to the backrest is reduced in one-third increments

X Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm.

X To exit the menu: press the k back button.

Massage function The availability of this function depends on the type of seat and the vehicle model series.

Example display (M-Class or GL-Class) X Select the seat (Y page 52). X Select Massage by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. A list appears. You can select different types of massage function: R0: Off R1: Slow and Gentle R2: Slow and Vigorous R3: Fast and Gentle R4: Fast and Vigorous

54 Seat functions Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

X Turn cVd or slide ZV the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm. The massage function runs for approx- imately 15 to 25minutes, depending on the setting.

X To exit the menu: press the k back button.

Adjusting the driving dynamics This function is available on vehicle model series with a dynamic multicontour seat.

X Select the seat (Y page 52). X Select Dynamic Seat by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. A scale appears. You can select: R0: Off R1: level 1 (medium setting) R2: level 2 (high setting)

X Turn cVd or slide ZV the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm.

X To exit the menu: press the k back button.

Resetting all adjustments

X Select the seat (Y page 52). X Select Reset All by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. A prompt appears.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select No, the process will be can- celed. After you select Yes, all seat adjustments are reset to the default values (factory set- ting).

Rear view camera

The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your imme- diate surroundings. You are always responsi- ble for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking,make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. The image from the rear view camera is shown in the COMAND display when reverse gear is engaged if: Ryour vehicle is equipped with a rear view camera RCOMAND is switched on Rthe Activation by R gear function is activated.

If the function is activated, the COMAND dis- play will automatically switch back to the pre-

Rear view camera 55

Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

viously selected display as soon as you shift out of reverse gear. For further information on the rear view cam- era, see the vehicle Operator's Manual. X Press the W button. The system menu appears.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Rear View Camera and pressW to confirm.

X Select Activation by R gear and press W to confirm. The function is switched on O or off , depending on the previous status.

Night View Assist Plus

On vehicles with Night View Assist Plus you can have the image from Night View Assist Plus shown on the COMAND display. X Switch on COMAND (Y page 29). X Activate Night View Assist Plus, see the separate operating instructions. The image from Night View Assist Plus appears in the COMAND display.

X To adjust the brightness: select Bright ness by turning cVd the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm.

X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Switching automatic activation on/off: select Night View Assist Auto. Acti vation and pressW to confirm. Switch the option on O or off . Option switched on: while using other func- tions e.g. the navigation system,Night View Assist Plus is active in the background. In the dark, in unlit surroundings and at speeds in excess of 37 mph (60 km/h), the Night View image is automatically dis- played as soon as pedestrians or animals are detected.

X To switch off the display: select Back and pressW to confirm or press the k but- ton.

360 camera

Important notes The 360 camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your imme- diate surroundings. You are always responsi- ble for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking,make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.

Overview The 360 camera surveys the vehicle sur- roundings and assists you, for example when parking or at exits with reduced visibility. The 360 camera images can be shown in full screenmode or in seven different split-screen views on the COMAND display. A split-screen view also includes a top view of the vehicle. This view is calculated from the data supplied by the installed cameras (virtual camera).

Displaying the 360 camera image The 360 camera image can be displayed if: Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360 cam- era RCOMAND is switched on (Y page 29) Rthe 360 Camera function is activated You can activate the 360 display by: Rengaging reverse gear (only possible if the Activation by R gear option is activa- ted) Rselecting the 360 Camera menu item in the System menu Rpressing and holding the W function button

56 360 camera Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

As soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of 19 mph (30 km/h) with the function activa- ted, the function switches off. The COMAND display switches back to the previously selec- ted view. You can also switch the display by selecting the& symbol in the display and pressingW the COMAND controller. X To switch reverse gear activation on/ off: press the W function button. The system menu appears.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select 360 Camera and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Activation by R gear and press W to confirm. The function is switched on O or off , depending on the previous status. i You need only switch this function on if you want the 360 camera image to be dis- played when you engage reverse gear. The other activation options are always availa- ble as well.

X To display the 360 camera image: press the W function button for at least 2 seconds. The full-screen display appears.

or X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select 360 Camera and pressW to con- firm. The 360 camera image appears in split- screen mode.

or X Engage reverse gear (only possible if the Activation by R gear option is activa- ted) The 360 camera split-screen image with backing up image appears.

For a detailed description of the 360 cam- era, see the separate vehicle Operator's Man- ual.

360 camera 57

Ve hi cl e fu nc tio

ns

58

Your COMAND equipment .................. 60 Introduction ......................................... 60 Basic settings ...................................... 62 Destination entry ................................ 63 Entering a POI ...................................... 76 Personal POIs ...................................... 82 Search & Send ..................................... 86 Route guidance ................................... 87 Traffic reports ..................................... 99 Destination memory ......................... 103 Previous destinations ....................... 107 Map operation and map settings .... 108 Additional settings ........................... 114 Problems with the navigation sys- tem ..................................................... 120

59

Na vi ga tio

n

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described.

Introduction

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating COMAND. COMAND calculates the route to the destina- tion without taking account of the following, for example: Rtraffic lights Rstop and yield signs Rmerging lanes Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no stopping zone Rother road and traffic rules and regulations Rnarrow bridges COMAND can give incorrect navigation com- mands if the actual street/traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data. Digital maps do not cover all areas nor all routes in an area. For example, a routemay

have been diverted or the direction of a one- way street may have changed. For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and reg- ulations always have priority over the sys- tem's driving recommendations. Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving. Please always use this feature instead of con- sulting the map display for directions. Look- ing at the icons or map display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident.

General notes

Operational readiness of the navigation system The navigation system must determine the position of the vehicle before first use or whenever operational status is restored. Therefore, you may have to drive for a while before precise route guidance is possible.

GPS reception Among other things, correct functioning of the navigation systemdepends onGPS recep- tion. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tun- nels or parking garages.

i Using roof carriers may impair the correct functioning of a roof antenna (phone, sat- ellite radio, GPS).

Entry restriction On vehicles for certain countries, there is a restriction on entering data. The restriction is active from a vehicle speed of above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). As soon as the speed falls below approximately

60 Introduction Na

vi ga tio

n

2 mph (3 km/h), the restriction becomes inactive. When the restriction is active, certain entries cannot be made. This will be indicated by the fact that certain menu items are grayed out and cannot be selected. The following entries are not possible, for example: Rentering the destination city and street Rentering a destination via the map Rentering POIs in the vicinity of a city or via a name search Rediting entries Rusing the number keypad for direct entry Other entries are possible, such as entering points of interest in the vicinity of the desti- nation or current position.

Switching to navigation mode

Map showing the menu; route guidance inactive : Status bar ; Main function bar = Current vehicle position ? Navigation menu bar X Press the function button. The map is displayed with the menu either shown or hidden. or

X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Themap is displayed with themenu shown.

Map without the menu (route guidance inactive) : Current vehicle position ; Map orientation selected = Map scale selected

i Route guidance active means that you have entered a destination and that COMAND has calculated the route. The dis- play shows the route, changes of direction and lane recommendations. Navigation announcements guide you to your destina- tion. Route guidance inactive means that no destination has been entered yet and no route has been calculated yet.

Showing/hiding the menu You can show or hide the menu on the map. X To hide themenu: slide ZV the COMAND controller and, when the Full Screen menu item is shown, pressW to confirm.

or X Press the k back button. The map can be seen in the full-screen dis- play.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller when the map is shown in full- screen display.

Introduction 61

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Basic settings

Setting route type and route options

Route settings menu (start of menu) : To select the route type ; To set the number of persons in the vehi-

cle for the use of carpool lanes = To set route options X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Route Settings and pressW to confirm. The route settings menu appears.

X Select a route type and pressW to confirm. A filled circle indicates the current setting.

X Select the route option(s) and pressW to confirm. The route options are switched on O or off , depending on the previous status.

i If you change the route type and/or the route options while route guidance is active, COMANDwill calculate a new route. If you change the route type and/or the route options while route guidance is inac- tive, COMAND uses the new setting for the next route guidance. Route guidance active: a destination has been entered and the route has been cal- culated. Route guidance inactive: no destination has been entered yet and no route has been calculated yet.

You can select the following route types: RFast Route: COMAND calculates a route with the shortest (minimized) journey time. RDynamic Traffic Route: is the same route type as Fast Route. In addition, COMAND takes into account any relevant traffic reports received during route guid- ance. The navigation system can help you avoid a traffic jam, for example, by recal- culating the route. RDynamic TRF. Route Only After Request: is the same route type as Dynamic Traffic Route. After recalcu- lating the route, COMAND asks you whether youwant to adopt the new route or whether you want to continue along the original route. REco Route: the Eco Route (economical route) is a variant of the Fast Route type. COMANDwill attempt to minimize the jour- ney distance at the expense of a slightly increased journey time. RShort Route: COMAND calculates a route with the shortest possible (minimized) route distance.

i The route calculated may, for example, include ferry connections, even if the Avoid Ferries route option is switched on. In some cases, COMAND may not be able to take all the selected route options into account, e.g. when calculating particularly long routes.

X To exit themenu: slide XVY the COMAND controller.

Setting the number of persons in the vehicle for the use of carpool lanes For route calculation, you can take HOV or carpool lanes into account. If you use HOV or carpool lanes, please observe the applicable laws as well as the local and time limitation conditions.

62 Basic settings Na

vi ga tio

n

Carpool lanesmay only be used under certain conditions. They can normally be used when there are two people in the vehicle. However, there are also carpool laneswhich can only be used when there are three or more people in the vehicle. In California, lone drivers can use a carpool lane if their vehicle's emission level or fuel consumption is below a fixed thresh- old. Carpool lanes may be reserved for specific times (e.g. during the peak period). Carpool lanes are identified by HOV symbols on special road signs and by markings on the road. The road signs may also include the designation CARPOOL. The lanes are arranged as a separate lane next to the others or are built as a physically separate lane. Depending on the setting under Number of Occupants in Vehicle, COMAND uses car- pool lanes when calculating the route. COMAND then guides you in and out of car- pool lanes using visual and acoustic driving directions.

X In the route settings menu, select Number of Occupants in Vehicle by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select 1, 2 or More than 2 by turning cVd and pressW to confirm. A # dot indicates the current setting.

Destination entry

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating COMAND.

Entering a destination by address

Introduction When entering an address as the destination, you have the following options: Rentering the state/province, city/ZIP code and street Rentering the state/province, city and cen- ter

Destination entry 63

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Rentering the state/province, city/ZIP code, street and house number Rentering the state/province, city/ZIP code, street and intersection Rentering the state/province, street, city and house number Rentering the state/province, street and house number Rentering the state/province, street and intersection

i You can only enter those cities, streets, ZIP codes etc. that are stored on the digital map. This means that for some countries, you cannot enter ZIP codes, for example.

The step-by-step instructions for entering an address use the following example data: New York (state) New York (city) 40 Broadway Of course, you can freely enter information such as state/province, city, street and house number, for example to enter your home address.

Address entry menu Calling up the address entry menu X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

Address entry menu X Select Address Entry and pressW to confirm. The address entry menu appears. If you have previously entered a destination, this will be shown in the display.

Depending on the amount of the address entered and the data in the digital map, some menu itemsmay not be available at all or may not yet be available. Example: after entering the state/province, the menu items Map, No., Center, Inter section, Save and Start are not available. The ZIP menu item will not be available unless the digital map contains zip codes.

Entering the state/province, city, street and number Selecting a state/province X Call up the address entry menu (Y page 64).

X Select State/Prov in the address entry menu by turning cVd the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm. A menu with the available lists appears: RLast States/Provinces RStates (U.S.A.) RProvinces (Canada)

64 Destination entry Na

vi ga tio

n

X To select a list: turn cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The list of selected states/provinces appears.

X To select a state/province: turn cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The address entrymenu appears again. The state/province selected has now been entered.

Entering the city X Call up the address entry menu (Y page 64).

X Select City in the address entry menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You will see the city list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2).

City list with character bar

Option 1: city list with the character bar X Enter NEW YORK. Character entry, using city input as an example (Y page 35).

List of cities as selection list

Option 2: city list as selection list X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Irrespective of the option, pressW to con- firm your selection. The address entrymenu appears again. The city has now been entered.

Entering the street name X Call up the address entry menu (Y page 64).

X Select Street in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. You will see the street list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2).

Street list with character bar

Option 1: street list with character bar X Enter BROADWAY. Character entry, using city input as an example (Y page 35).

Destination entry 65

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Street list as selection list

Option 2: street list as selection list X Select a street by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. If an entry has theG symbol, it is ambig- uous. You can select the entry you want from an additional selection list.

X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Irrespective of the option, pressW to con- firm your selection. The address entrymenu appears again. The street has now been entered.

Entering the house number Entering a house number will delete a previ- ously entered intersection. X Call up the address entry menu (Y page 64).

X Select No. in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZV the

COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. You will see the house number list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2).

House number list with character bar

Option 1: house number list with character bar X Enter 4 and 0. Character entry, using city input as an example (Y page 35).

House number list as selection list

Option 2: house number list as selection list X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Irrespective of the option, pressW to con- firm your selection. The address entrymenu appears again. The house number has now been entered.

66 Destination entry Na

vi ga tio

n

Entering the ZIP code, center and inter- section Entering the ZIP code X Call up the address entry menu (Y page 64).

X Select ZIP in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. You will see the ZIP code list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2).

List of ZIP codes with character bar

Option 1: ZIP code list with character bar X Enter a ZIP code. Character entry, using city input as an example (Y page 35).

ZIP code list as selection list

Option 2: ZIP code list as selection list X Select the desired ZIP code by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Irrespective of the option, pressW to con- firm your selection. If COMAND is able to assign the ZIP code unambiguously to a specific address, the address entry menu appears again. The ZIP code appears in place of the city's name. If COMAND cannot assign the ZIP code unambiguously to a specific address, the address entry menu also appears again. The ZIP code is automatically entered. You can now enter the street for a more precise location. Only streets in the area covered by the entered ZIP code are available.

X Start route calculation (Y page 69). Entering the center Entering a center will, for example, delete a previously entered street. X Call up the address entry menu (Y page 64).

X Select Center in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm. You will see the center list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2).

City center list with character bar

Option 1: center list with character bar X Enter a center. Character entry, using city input as an example (Y page 35).

Destination entry 67

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Center list as selection list

Option 2: center list as selection list X Select a center by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Irrespective of the option, pressW to con- firm your selection. The address entrymenu appears again. The center selected has been entered.

X Start route calculation (Y page 69). Entering the intersection X Call up the address entry menu (Y page 64).

X Select Intersection in the address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. You will see the intersection list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selec- tion list (option 2).

Intersection list with character bar : List entry most closely resembling the

characters entered so far ; List = Character bar Option 1: intersection list with character bar X Enter an intersection. Character entry, using city input as an example (Y page 35).

Intersection list as selection list

Option 2: intersection list as selection list X Select an intersection by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Irrespective of the option, pressW to con- firm your selection. The address entrymenu appears again. The intersection selected has been entered.

X Start route calculation (Y page 69).

68 Destination entry Na

vi ga tio

n

Starting route calculation

Address entry menu with destination address : Destination address ; Starts route calculation You can have COMAND calculate a route to the destination address, or you can save the destination address (for example, as your home address (My address)) (Y page 69). X Call up the address entry menu (Y page 64).

X In the address entry menu, confirm Start by pressingW. If no other route has been calculated, route calculation starts immediately (option 1). If another route has already been calculated (route guidance is active), a prompt appears (option 2). i The Continue menu item is displayed instead of Start if Calculate Alterna tive Routes is activated in the navigation menu (option 2) (Y page 93).

Option 1 no route guidance active: route calculation starts.While route calculation is in progress, an arrow will indicate the direction to your destination. Below this, you will see a message, e.g. Calculating Fast Route.... Once the route has been calculated, route guidance begins. If the vehicle is not on a digitized road, the following is displayed: Rthe linear distance to the destination Rthe direction to the destination Rthe Off Mapped Road message

Option 2 route guidance is already active: if route guidance is already active, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to terminate the currently active route guid- ance. X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, COMAND will stop route guidance and start route calculation for the new destination. If you select No, COMAND will continue with the active route guidance. i Route calculation takes a certain amount of time. The time depends on the distance from the destination, for example. COMAND calculates the route using the digital map data. The calculated route can differ from the ideal route, for example because of incom- plete map data. Please also refer to the notes about the digital map (Y page 118).

Entering and saving your home address You can either enter your home address for the first time (option 1) or edit a previously stored home address (option 2). X Option 1: enter the address, e.g. a city, street and house number (Y page 64).

X After entering the address in the address entry menu, select Save by turning c V d and Z V sliding the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Save as "My Address" and press W to confirm. COMAND stores your home address as My Address in the destination memory.

X Option 2: proceed as described under "Option 1". A prompt appears asking whether the cur- rent home address should be overwritten.

X Select Yes and pressW to confirm. After selecting Yes, the Data saved.mes- sage appears.

Destination entry 69

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Selecting a destination from the des- tination memory (e.g. My Address)

Introduction The destination memory always contains an entry named "My Address". You may wish to assign your home address to this entry, for example (Y page 69), and select it for route guidance. This entry is always located at the top of the list in the destination memory. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation sys- tem menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select From Memory and pressW to con- firm. You will see the destination memory list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2).

Option 1: destination memory list with character bar

: Character entered by the user ; Characters automatically added by the

system = List entry most closely resembling the

characters entered so far ? Switches to the selection list A Deletes an entry

B Characters not currently available C Character bar D Currently selected character E Cancels an entry F Characters currently available X Enter a destination, e.g. "My Address". Character entry, using city input as an example (Y page 35).

Option 2: destination memory list as selection list

Destination memory list X Select My Address by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Irrespective of the option, pressW to con- firm your selection. The address entry menu appears again. "My Address" has been entered.

X To start route calculation: select Start and pressW to confirm.

Entering a destination from the list of last destinations X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation sys- tem menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

70 Destination entry Na

vi ga tio

n

X Select From Last Destinations and pressW to confirm.

X Select the desired destination by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The address entrymenu appears again. The destination address selected has been entered.

X To start route calculation: select Start and pressW to confirm. Once the route has been calculated, route guidance begins (Y page 69).

i Last destinations memory (Y page 107).

Entering a destination using the map

Calling up the map X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation sys- tem menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

: Current vehicle position ; Crosshair = Details of the crosshair position ? Map scale selected X Select Using Map and pressW to confirm. You will see the map with a crosshair.

Display= depends on the settings selected in "Map information in the display" (Y page 111). You can see the current street name if the digital map contains the neces- sary data, You can see the coordinates of the crosshair if the geo-coordinate display is switched on and the GPS signal is strong enough.

Moving the map and selecting the des- tination X To scroll the map: slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller.

X To set the map scale: as soon as you turn cVd the COMAND controller, the scale bar appears.

X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set. Turning clockwise zooms out from themap; turning counter-clockwise zooms in.

Destination entry 71

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X To select a destination: pressW the COMAND controller once or several times. If COMAND is unable to assign a unique address, you will see either the address entry menu with the destination address or a selection list.

X Select a destination by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. If the destination is within the limits of the digital map, COMAND attempts to assign the destination to the map. If the destination can be assigned, you will see the address entry menu with the address of the destination. If not, you will see the Destination From Map entry.

X To start route calculation: select Start and pressW to confirm.

Entering a destination using geo-coor- dinates X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation sys- tem menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Using Geo-Coordinates and pressW to confirm. An entry menu appears.

You can now enter the latitude and longitude coordinates with the COMAND controller or the number keypad (Y page 35). X To change a value: turn cVd the COMAND controller.

X To move the mark within the line: slide XVY the COMAND controller.

X To move the mark between the lines: slide ZV the COMAND controller.

X To confirm the value: pressW the COMAND controller.

i If the selected position is outside the dig- ital map, COMAND uses the nearest digi- tized road for route calculation. Youwill see the The co-ordinates are outside the map area message. If the selected position is located over a body of water, you will see the The destination is in a body of water. Please select another destination. message.

Entering a destination using Mercedes-Benz Apps X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation sys- tem menu bar by turning cVd the

72 Destination entry Na

vi ga tio

n

COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Mercedes-Benz Apps and pressW to confirm. If an Internet connection is established, you will see the message: Do you want to accept the navigation data sent via Mercedes-Benz Apps?

Street View

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the lower menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Address Entry and pressW to confirm.

X Select icon: in the address entry menu and pressW to confirm. If an Internet connection is established, you will see the Street View basic display.

X To explore the view of the street: turn cVd or slide XVY, ZV the COMAND controller.

X To return to navigation: press the k button.

Entering way points

Introduction You canmap the route yourself by entering up to four way points. The sequence of the way points can be changed at any time. COMAND provides a selection of predefined destinations in eight categories for this pur- pose, e.g. GAS STATION or COFFEE SHOP. You can also use the destination entry options to enter way points.

Creating way points

Way point menu (with destination, without way point) X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation sys- tem menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Intermediate Destinations and pressW to confirm. The destination is entered into the way points menu. The way points are not yet entered.

X Confirm Add: by pressingW the COMAND controller.

Destination entry 73

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X Select the category or Other by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. After selecting a category, the POIs which are available along the route and in the vicinity are displayed. COMAND first searches for destinations along the route. Searching for destinations then continues within a radius of approx- imately 60 miles (100 km) of the vehicle position.

X After selecting Other, select one of the destination entry options from the list.

Selection Step

Address Entry X Enter a destina- tion by address (Y page 63).

From Memory X Select a destina- tion from the des- tination memory (Y page 70).

From Last Desti nations

X Select a destina- tion from the list of last destina- tions (Y page 70).

From POIs X Select a point of interest (Y page 76).

From Personal POIs

X Enter a destina- tion from the per- sonal POIs (Y page 85).

Selection Step

Using the Map X Enter a destina- tion using themap (Y page 71).

Using Geo-Coor dinates

X Enter a destina- tion using the geo- coordinates (Y page 72).

X Select POI and pressW to confirm. After selecting a POI or entering a destina- tion, the address of the way point is dis- played. After entering a destination using the map, the address entry menu is displayed. OK is highlighted.

X To accept the way point: confirm OK by pressingW. Once you have accepted the way point, it is entered in the way point menu.

74 Destination entry Na

vi ga tio

n

X To display the details: select Details by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X To make a call: select Call with the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. COMAND switches to telephone mode (Y page 132). i This menu item is available if the way point has a telephone number and if a mobile phone is connected to COMAND (Y page 126).

X To call up the map: select Map with the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X You can move the map and select the des- tination.

X To store the way point in the destina- tion memory: select Presets with the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm (Y page 105).

Way point menu with two way point entries

Editing way points Way points can be: Rchanged Rchanged in sequence in theway pointmenu Rdeleted To change the sequence, at least one way point and the destination must be entered.

X Select a way point in the way point menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X To change a way point: select Edit from the menu and pressW to confirm.

X Change the address, e.g. the city and street, and confirm with OK. The way point menu appears and displays the modified way point.

You can change the sequence of the way points and the destination.

Destination entry 75

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X To change the sequence: from the menu, select Move by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and move the way point or destination to the desired position, then pressW to confirm.

X To delete way points: from the menu, select Delete and pressW to confirm.

Accepting way points for the route X Select Start in the way point menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The route is calculated with the entered way points. i Continue is displayed instead of Start when Calculate Alternative Routes is activated in the navigation menu (Y page 93).

i If a way point has been passed during route guidance, the way point will be dis- played in the way point menu with a green arrow. Once the route has been recalcula- ted, the way point is deleted from the way point menu.

Searching for a gas station when the fuel level is low If the reserve fuel warning is displayed, you will see the message: Fuel tank reserve level. Do you want to start the search for gas stations?. X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, the gas station search starts. When the search is complete, a list of the gas stations available along the route or in the vicinity is displayed.

If you select No, the search is canceled. X Select a gas station and pressW to con- firm. The address of the gas station is displayed.

X Confirm Start by pressingW. The selected gas station is entered into position 1 of the way points menu. Route guidance begins. If the way points menu already contains four way points, a prompt will be displayed, asking you whether you wish to enter the gas station into position 1. If you select Yes, the gas station is transferred into the list and way point 4 is deleted.

Entering a POI

Calling up the POI menu

Example: POI menu

POIs are predefined destinations within cat- egories, e.g. a gas station in the AUTOMOTIVE category. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation sys- tem menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select From POIs and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

76 Entering a POI Na

vi ga tio

n

X Choose one of the options and pressW to confirm. Further steps are arranged in a table according to the option selected (Y page 78).

Entering a POI 77

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Defining the position for the POI search

Selection Characteristic Instructions

Near Destina tion

Entry is only possible when route guidance is active.

X Select Near Destination from the POI menu and pressW to confirm.

X Select a POI category (Y page 79).

Current Posi tion

The system looks for a point of interest in the vicinity of the current vehicle position.

X Select Current Position in the POI menu and pressW to confirm.

X Select a POI category (Y page 79).

Other City After entering a city, the system looks for the POI within the city.

Option 1 X Select Other City in the POI menu and pressW to confirm.

X If desired, select the state/province (Y page 64).

X Enter the city. Proceed as described in the "Entering a city" section (Y page 64).

X Select a POI category (Y page 79). Option 2 X Enter a city in the address entry menu (Y page 64).

X Select POI and pressW to confirm. X Select a point of interest category.

Search By Name You can call up all the points of interest in the digital map or focus your search on the three pre- viously selected posi- tions.

X Select Search By Name in the POImenu and pressW to confirm.

X Select All POIs or one of the three pre- viously selected positions. The POI list with character bar appears.

X Proceed as described in the "POI list with character bar" section (Y page 80).

Search By Phone Number

This function gives you access to all POIs that have a phone number.

X Select Search By Phone Number and pressW to confirm. You will see a list of phone numbers.

X Proceed as described in the "POI list with character bar" section (Y page 80).

78 Entering a POI Na

vi ga tio

n

Searching by point of interest cate- gory

POI category list X Call up the POI menu (Y page 76). After entering a city, the POI category list appears after choosing the menu item Near Destination, Current Position or Other City.

X Select a POI category by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. TheG arrow behind an entry shows that other categories are available.

GAS STATION category selected X Select an entry and pressW to confirm. The search for points of interest begins in the vicinity of the selected position.

Point of interest search near the current position (example)

The POI search is canceled when 50 POIs have been found. COMAND searches within a radius of approx- imately 60 miles (100 km). Once the search is completed, the POI list is displayed. If COMAND does not find any POIs within this radius, it extends its search range to approx- imately 125 miles (200 km). If COMAND finds one POI within this radius, it finishes the search.

POI list

Introduction

POI list (example)

The POI list displays the search results for the category in the vicinity of the selected posi- tion.

Entering a POI 79

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

The search results display the following infor- mation: Ran arrow that shows the linear direction to the point of interest Rthe linear distance to the POI Rthe name of the POI

i The arrow and linear distance to the des- tination are not visible if you have entered a POI after entering another city. The arrow is also not shown when search- ing for a POI in the vicinity of the destina- tion. Depending on the POI selected, COMAND uses different reference points in deter- mining the linear distance to the destina- tion: Rvicinity of current position: the linear dis- tance is the distance of the point of inter- est from the current vehicle position. Rvicinity of destination: the linear distance is the distance from the destination entered to the point of interest.

Selecting a POI

: Point of interest with address ; To start route calculation = To store an address in the destination

memory ? To display details A To make a call (when available) B To cancel selection C To display a point of interest's position on

the map

Further information on searching via POI cat- egories (Y page 79). X Select the POI in the POI list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The complete address of the point of inter- est selected is shown.

X To start route calculation: select Start; and pressW to confirm.

X To store an address in the destination memory: select Save= and pressW to confirm. You can now select storing options (Y page 105).

X To show the detailed view: select Details? and pressW to confirm.

X To make a call: select CallA and press W to confirm. COMAND switches to tele- phone mode (Y page 132). i This menu item is available if the POI has a telephone number and a mobile phone is connected to COMAND (Y page 126).

X To call up the map: select MapC and pressW to confirm.

X You can move the map and select the des- tination (Y page 71).

POI list with character bar

Search by name in the vicinity of the destination (example)

If you have selected Search By Name in the POI menu and then defined the position for the search (Y page 78), the POI list with char- acter bar appears.

80 Entering a POI Na

vi ga tio

n

Depending on your selection, you can select all available points of interest on the digital map or the points of interest in the vicinity of the selected position. X Proceed as described in "Searching for a phone book entry" (Y page 137). If COMAND can assign the characters entered to one entry unambiguously, the address entry appears automatically.

X To start route calculation: select Start and pressW to confirm.

ZAGAT survey service

The Z icon before a search result shows that a ZAGAT rating is available for this entry.

: ZAGAT ratings ; To display details X Select an entry with the "Z" icon by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The ZAGAT evaluations appear.

ZAGAT example description X To show the information: select Details and pressW to confirm.

Selecting a POI using the map

Point of interest on the map

You can select points of interest that are available in the selected (visible) section of the map. The POI is highlighted on the map, you will see further information on the upper edge of the display. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Guide in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If points of interest are available: Depending on the map scale selected, point of interest icons appear on the map. The scale at which the icons are displayed

Entering a POI 81

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

on the map varies according to the icon. You can select the icons that you want COMAND to display. If no points of interest are available, youwill see a message to this effect. i You also see this message if you have selected the No Symbolsmenu item under "Map display" (Y page 110).

X To confirm the message: pressW the COMAND controller.

X To select a POI: select Next or Previous and pressW to confirm.

X To show details for the selection: select Details and pressW to confirm.

X To change to the map: slide ZV the COMAND controller. You can move the map and select the map section.

X To start route calculation: select Start and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the point of interest should be used as the destina- tion.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. i Cont. is displayed instead of Startwhen Calculate Alternative Routes is acti- vated in the navigation menu (Y page 93).

Personal POIs

General notes i The use of personal POIs for displaying traffic surveillance equipment is not per- mitted in every country. Please observe the country-specific regulations and adapt your speed accordingly when driving.

Settings

Calling up the "Personal POIs" menu

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Personal POIs and pressW to confirm.

Displaying personal POIs on the map

The personal POIs are shown on themap with an icon according to their category. X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu (Y page 82).

X Select Display Personal POIs On Map in the menu and pressW to confirm. You can select different categories.

82 Personal POIs Na

vi ga tio

n

Selection Explanation

Not Clas sified

Standard entry for per- sonal POIs

COMAND Personal POIs (destina- tions, routes) that you have imported via the online function (Y page 171).

If you have created your own categories (e.g. "Fishing", "Hotels"), they are also displayed (Y page 83). X Select a category and pressW to confirm. The icon display is switched onOor off, depending on the previous status. i The iconswill be displayed in the following map scales: R1/16 mile (50 m) R1/8 mile (100 m) R1/4 mile (200 m) R1/2 mile (500 m)

Visual warning for personal POIs

If the vehicle is approaching a personal POI, this is highlighted on the map. The display for the corresponding category must be activa- ted for this.

X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu (Y page 82).

X In the "Personal POIs" menu, select Vis ual Warning For Personal POIs and pressW to confirm. Themenu displays the available categories.

X Select a category and pressW to confirm. This will switch the visual warning for all personal POIs of this category on O or off , depending on the previous setting.

Acoustic notification for personal POIs A gong sounds when the vehicle is approach- ing a personal POI. The function for the cor- responding category must be activated for this. X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu (Y page 82).

X In the "Personal POIs"menu, select Acous tic Notification for Personal POIs and pressW to confirm. Themenu displays the available categories.

X Select a category and pressW to confirm. This will switch the acoustic notification for all personal POIs of this category on O or off , depending on the previous setting.

Managing categories for personal points of interest

Personal POIs 83

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu (Y page 82).

X In the "Personal POIs" menu, select Man age Categories For Personal POIs and pressW to confirm.

X To create a new category: select New and pressW to confirm.

X Enter the name of the category. Character entry (Y page 33).

X Select the icon and pressW to con- firm. A list with icons appears. You can assign an icon to the category.

X Select a symbol by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. You have created a new category with a name and icon. This category appears when selecting the display on the map or when selecting the destination.

X To rename a category, to change an icon: select Rename or Change Icon and pressW to confirm.

X Proceed as described under "To create a new category".

X To delete a category: select Delete and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the cat- egory should be deleted. i If you delete a category, all points of inter- est of this category are also deleted.

X Select Yes and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, the category will be deleted. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

Managing personal POIs X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu (Y page 82).

X Select Manage Categories for Per sonal POIs in the menu and pressW to confirm.

X Select Not Classified, COMAND or your own category and pressW to confirm.

X Select a personal POI and pressW to con- firm. The personal point of interest is displayed.

For further information onmanaging personal POI categories (Y page 85): RRenaming RChanging the category RDeleting

Saving personal POIs There are three ways to save personal points of interest. You must insert an SD memory card to do so. The No Memory Cardmessage otherwise appears. Personal POIs and routes are saved on the memory card in the same data format in which the geographical data is stored. This format is based on the open GPX (GPS Exchange) format. Option 1 X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button.

84 Personal POIs Na

vi ga tio

n

X Hide the menu to show the map in full screen mode (Y page 61).

X PressW the COMAND controller for longer than two seconds. The current position of the vehicle is saved as a personal POI on the SDmemory card in the Not Classified category. i The crosshair position is saved in the scrolling map function (Y page 108).

Option 2 X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Save Position As Personal POI or Save Crosshair Pos. as Personal POI ("Movemap" function active) and press W to confirm. The list of personal categories appears.

X Select a category and pressW to confirm. X Name for the personal point of interest. Character entry (Y page 33).

Option 3 X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X Call up the address entry menu (Y page 64).

X Select Save from the address entry menu and pressW to confirm.

X Select Save As Personal POI and press W to confirm.

X Select a category. X Enter the name. The current address is saved as a personal point of interest on the SD memory card.

Importingpersonal POIs via theonline function You can import personal POIs (destinations, routes) via the online function (Y page 171). When importing, you can choose whether to write files to the SD memory card or to file them in the address book. The imported per- sonal POIs have their own icon and are filed in the COMAND category.

Selecting as the destination

X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation sys- tem menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select From Personal POIs and pressW to confirm. The categories of personal POIs appear.

Personal POIs 85

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Selection Explanation

Not Classi fied

Standard entry for per- sonal points of interest.

COMAND Personal POIs which you have imported via the online function (Y page 171).

Coffee Shops Symbol and category that you have created yourself (Y page 83).

In the example, the Coffee Shops category is selected. The personal points of interest for this cate- gory are shown.

X Select a personal POI and pressW to con- firm.

X To rename a personal POI: select Rename and pressW to confirm.

X To change the category: select Change Category and pressW to confirm.

X To change to the map: select Map and pressW to confirm. The position of the personal point of inter- est is shown in the map. i A symbol is displayed according to the "Displaying personal POIs on the map" set- ting (Y page 82).

X To start route calculation: select Start and pressW to confirm. If route guidance has been activated, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to accept the personal point of inter- est as the destination. If route guidance has not been activated, route calculation for the personal point of interest will start immediately.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, the personal POI is accep- ted as the destination. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

X Tomakeacall: selectCall andpressW to confirm. COMAND switches to telephone mode (Y page 133). i Call is available if the personal POI has a telephone number and a mobile phone is connected to COMAND (Y page 126).

X To delete a personal POI: select Delete and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to delete the point of interest.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, the personal POI is deleted. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

Search & Send

Notes i To use Search & Send, your vehicle needs to be equipped with mbrace, a navigation system and a valid mbrace subscription.

86 Search & Send Na

vi ga tio

n

Search & Send is a service assisting you in entering destinations for the navigation sys- tem. This mbrace service can send a destina- tion address directly from the Google Maps website to the navigation system of your vehi- cle.

Selecting and sending a destination address Please also refer to the notes about address entry online:maps.google.com. X Call up themaps.google.comwebsite and enter the destination address in the address entry field.

X Click the corresponding button to send the destination address to the e-mail address registered with mbrace.

X Enter the e-mail address you specified when setting up your mbrace account into the corresponding field in the "Send" dialog window.

X Click "Send".

Calling up destination addresses

X Press thembrace information button. Downloading of the destination address to the navigation system of your vehicle begins. i If you have sent more than one destina- tion address to your vehicle's navigation system, you will need to call up the infor-

mation individually for every address to be downloaded.

X Select Yeswhen the prompt for starting the navigation system is shown. The window for starting the navigation system appears (Y page 69).

X Select Start. or X Select No to store the downloaded desti- nation in the destination memory for later use. i The destination addresses are downloa- ded in the same order as they are sent. If you own several Mercedes-Benz vehicles equipped with mbrace and a valid sub- scriber account: each destination address can be downloaded by each vehicle. This requires each vehicle to be registered with an e-mail address in your mbrace account.

Route guidance

Important notes COMAND calculates the route to the destina- tion without taking account of the following, for example: Rtraffic lights Rstop and yield signs Rmerging lanes Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no stopping zone Rother road and traffic rules and regulations Rnarrow bridges

Route guidance 87

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

COMAND may give differing navigation com- mands if the actual street/traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data. For example, if the road layout or the direction of a one-way street has been changed. For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and reg- ulations always have priority over the sys- tem's driving recommendations. Route guidance begins once a route has been calculated (Y page 69). COMAND guides you to your destination by means of navigation announcements in the form of audible navigation announcements and route guidance displays. The route guidance displays can be seen if the display is switched to navigation mode. If you do not follow the navigation announce- ments or if you leave the calculated route, COMAND automatically calculates a new route to the destination. If the digital map contains the corresponding information, the following applies: Rduring route guidance, COMAND tries to avoid roads with restricted access. Those roads, for example, that are closed to through-traffic. Rroads that have time restrictions (e.g. closed on Sundays and public holidays) are considered for route guidance on days when they are open. For this purpose, the relevant times must be correctly stored in the database.

Displays during route guidance

Change of direction Changes of direction have three phases: Rpreparation phase Rannouncement phase Rchange-of-direction phase

Example: preparation phase : Next road ; Point at which the change of direction

takes place (light blue dot) = Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-

angle indicates the vehicles direction of travel)

? Current road Display? depends on the setting selected for "Map information in the display" (Y page 111). COMAND prepares you for the upcoming change of direction. Based on the example display below, the change of direction is announced by the Prepare to turn right message. You see the full-screen map.

Example: announcement phase : Next road ; Change of direction (turn right here) = Graphic representation of the distance to

the next change of direction ? Distance to the next change of direction

88 Route guidance Na

vi ga tio

n

A Route (highlighted in blue, shown in both the left and right displays)

B Point at which the change of direction takes place (light blue dot, shown in both the left and right displays)

i The filled-in section of visual display for distance= gets shorter the nearer you get to the announced change of direction.

COMAND announces the imminent change of direction. Based on the example display below, the change of direction is announced beforehand by the message: Please turn right in 500 ft. and follow the . The distance announced before the next change of direction depends on the type of road and its permissible maximum speed. The display is now split into two sectors. In the left half, you see the normal map view. The right-hand half shows: Ran enlarged section of the area around the intersection (crossing zoom) or Ra 3D image of the road's course with the route indicating the next change of direc- tion

Example: change-of-direction phase : Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-

angle indicates the vehicles direction of travel)

; Graphic representation of the distance to the next change of direction

= Distance to the next change of direction COMAND announces the imminent change of direction.

Based on the example display below, the change of direction is announced 150 ft before the change of direction with the Now turn right message. The display is split into two halves, as in the announcement phase. Once the change of direction is completed, COMAND automatically switches back to full- screen display.

Example of a displaywithout changesof direction

: Route (highlighted in blue) ; Current vehicle position = Current road ? Map orientation selected A Map scale selected

Lane recommendations

Example: lane recommendations : Point of the next change of direction ; Point of the change of direction after next = Next change of direction (in this case, turn

off to the right)

Route guidance 89

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

? Graphic representation of the distance to the next change of direction

A Distance to the next change of direction B Possible lane (light blue) C Recommended lane (dark blue) D Lane not recommended (gray) E Current vehicle position, the tip of the tri-

angle indicating the vehicles direction of travel

On multi-lane roads, COMAND can display lane recommendations for the next change of direction. The corresponding data must be available in the digital map. COMAND displays lane recommendationC based on the next two changes of direction. The number of lanes applies to the point at which the next change of direction is required.

i The multifunction display also shows lane recommendations. Only the recommended lanes are displayed here, see the separate vehicle Operator's Manual.

Display and description of lane recom- mendations

Lane Day mode

Night mode

Recommended lane In this lane, you will be able to complete the next two changes of direction without changing lanes.

Dark blue

Light blue

Possible lane In this lane, you will only be able to com- plete the next change of direction without changing lanes.

Light blue

Dark blue

Lane not recom- mended In this lane, you will not be able to com- plete the next change of direction without changing lanes.

Light brown or light gray

Gray

i The colors used in the lane recommenda- tion display vary depending on whether day or night mode is switched on.

90 Route guidance Na

vi ga tio

n

HOV or carpool lanes

: HOV symbol on the road sign ; HOV symbol on the car pool lane A route may be calculated taking the use of HOV or carpool lanes into account. You can use HOV or carpool lanes depending on the number of persons in the vehicle as well as the local and time limitation conditions.

i This information is stored in themap data.

i You can enter the number of people in the vehicle (Y page 62). In this section, you can also find more information on HOV or car- pool lanes.

If the system guides you to or from a carpool lane, COMAND provides you with visual and acoustic driving instructions.

Navigation announcements

Repeating navigation announcements Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving. Please always use this feature instead of consulting themap display for directions. The symbols or themap display could distract you from traffic conditions and driving. If you havemissed an announcement, you can call up the current announcement at any time. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select RPT in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

Switching navigation announcements on/off X To switch off: press the8 button dur- ing an announcement. You will briefly see the message: The driving instructions have been muted.

X To switch on: pressW the COMAND con- troller.

X Select RPT in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm. i COMANDautomatically switches the nav- igation announcements back on when: Ryou have a new route calculated Ryou switchCOMANDonagain or start the engine

Switching announcements and audio fadeout on/off X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Announcements and pressW to confirm. A menu appears. You can activate/deactivate the following functions: RAnnounce Street Names Street names are announced during route guidance. RAudible Info During Phone Call During a phone call, navigation announcements and traffic reports are audible in the background. RAudio Fadeout

Route guidance 91

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

The volume of an active audio or video source is automatically reduced during a navigation announcement. RGas on Reserve Once you have reached reserve fuel level, you will see a prompt asking whether youwish to start the search for a gas station (Y page 76).

X Select the function and pressW to confirm. Switch the function on O or off .

Setting the volume manually X Adjust the volume using the q control knob during a navigation announcement.

or X Select RPT in the map view with the menu shown and adjust the volume using the q control knob.

Announce Street Names If the function is switched on, the name of the street which you are turning into is announced. Announcements are not made in the chosen language in all countries. They aremadewhen relevant street names for the selected lan- guage are available in the database. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Announce Street Names and press W to confirm. The function is switched on O or off , depending on the previous status.

Exit route guidance

Canceling or continuing route guidance X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation sys- tem menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X To cancel route guidance: select Cancel Route Guidance and pressW to confirm.

or X To continue route guidance: select Con tinue Route Guidance and pressW to confirm. COMAND calculates the route.

Destination or area of destination reached When you reach your destination, COMAND displays a checkered flag and route guidance is automatically ended. If the destination is not in close proximity to a digitized street, the Area of destination reached message appears when the desti- nation is reached.

Influencing route guidance

Avoiding a section of the route blocked by a traffic jam This function blocks a section of the route ahead of you. You can set the length of the blocked route section. If possible, COMAND calculates a detour around the blocked sec- tion of the route. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

92 Route guidance Na

vi ga tio

n

X Select Route in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Detour and pressW to confirm. X To block a section of the route: select Longer or Shorter repeatedly and press W to confirm until the desired section has been selected. i The total length of the section that can be blocked is defined by the digital map. The menu items are available accordingly.

X To start route calculation: select Start and pressW to confirm.

X To delete the blocked section: select Delete while the message is shown and pressW to confirm. COMAND calculates the route without the block.

Selecting an alternative route With the "Alternative Route" function, routes other than the original one can be calculated. Routes 1 to 3 are calculated with the current settings for the route type and route options and are shown with a dark blue line (Y page 62). Route 4 is the economic route (eco route) and is shown with a green line. On the right-hand side, you will see informa- tion on the currently selected alternative route, e.g. distance, estimated remaining driving time and estimated time of arrival. Route sections used (e.g. highways, tunnels) are displayed as symbols. Option 1 X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Route in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Alternative Route and pressW to confirm.

Examples for route 1 (above) and route 4 (eco route) Option 2 X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Calculate Alternative Route and pressW to confirm. The function is switched on O or off , depending on the previous status. Function is activated: alternative routes are calculated directly after the destination is entered.

Route guidance 93

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Menu functions X To select the next or previous alterna- tive route: select Next or Previous and pressW to confirm.

X To start route guidance using the selec- ted alternative route: select Start and pressW to confirm. COMAND begins route guidance on the selected alternative route.

Route information

Displaying destination information

Example: destination information

The example shows information on distance, estimated time of arrival and estimated remaining driving time to the destinationO and two way points. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Route in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Destination Information and pressW to confirm. Destination information is displayed.

X To call up further destination informa- tion: turn cVd the COMAND controller.

X To close the destination information: slide XVY the COMAND controller or press the k back button.

i You can display destination information for the destination, for both way points and for the intermediate stop, if they are part of the route. If a mobile phone is connected to COMAND and a phone number is included in the des- tination information, you can call it (Y page 126).

Route overview You can use the route overview tomove along the active route section by section and view information and details about each section of the route. You can see information relevant to the sec- tion of the route, such as the length of the road section you will be driving along and the road name. The highlighted route section is marked in white with a red border on themap. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Route in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Route Browser and pressW to confirm.

X To view the next or previous route sec- tion: select Next or Previous and pressW to confirm. i If the first or last route section is high- lighted, you cannot select Previous or Next.

X To zoom in or out of themap: selectN or M and pressW to confirm.

X To close the route overview: select Back and pressW to confirm.

94 Route guidance Na

vi ga tio

n

Route demonstration

You can see the route before starting your journey. This function is only available when the vehicle is stationary. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Route in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Route Demonstration and press W to confirm. The map with the crosshair appears.

X To get to the destination: pressW to confirm the highlighted symbol.

X To stop the route demonstration: con- firm the symbol by pressingW.

Example: route display stopped : Road name and city display when route

display has been stopped ; Distance of the crosshair from current

vehicle position X To get to the current vehicle position: pressW to confirm the symbol for the cur- rent vehicle position.

X To change the map scale: select Scale and pressW to confirm. The scale bar appears.

X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Recording the route

Notes If you have activated COMAND and the SD memory card has been inserted, you should not take it out of the slot. You can store up to 100 routes. When you record a route, COMAND uses so- called support points and displays the route as a series of lines. If the route is then calcu- lated, COMAND attempts to align the recor- ded route with the digital map. The support points of the route may not be on a digitized road. This is often the case for routes that have been calculated using map data from other sources.

Route guidance 95

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Calling up the Routes menu

X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196). X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation sys- tem menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Routes. Starting/ending recording

X Call up the Routes menu (Y page 96). X To start recording : select Start Recording in the Routes menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. During the recording, the recorded route is shown behind the current vehicle position with gray strokes (symbol for tire tracks).

X Toend recording: select Stop Recording in the Routes menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

Displaying and editing the recorded route

X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196). X Call up the Routes menu (Y page 96). X Select List in the Routes menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Previously recorded routes are displayed.

X Select a route and pressW to confirm. The map appears with a menu. The recor- ded route is shown in the map with a blue dotted line.

X To viewademonstration of the route on the map: select Demo by turning cVd the

96 Route guidance Na

vi ga tio

n

COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The map with the crosshair appears.

X Proceed as described in the "Route dem- onstration" section (Y page 95).

X To begin route calculation: select Start in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. COMAND attempts to align the recorded route with the digital map.

Changing route names and icons X Select Edit in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X To change the route name: select Rename and pressW to confirm. i The name cannot be changed while the vehicle is in motion.

X To change the icon: select Change Icon and pressW to confirm.

Observe the further information on managing categories for personal POIs (Y page 83). To change direction for route calculation: you can set the icon for the route to the start- ing point or to the destination, thereby chang- ing the direction for route calculation. During route calculation, one-way streets or turn restrictions, for example, are taken into account. Therefore, the outward and return routes may differ from each other. X Select Swap in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X To delete a route: select Delete in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears askingwhether the route should be deleted.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, the route will be deleted. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

Scanning the memory The SD memory card is inserted. X Call up the Routes menu (Y page 96). X Select Memory Info in the Routesmenu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Amessage such as Off-road Route Mem ory 90% Full. is displayed.

Off-road and off-map

Notes The navigation system may guide you to off- road routes that your vehicle cannot drive on without causing damage to the tires orwheels or the vehicle itself. It is the drivers sole responsibility to determine the suitability of the route. The condition of the off-road routes may vary, and their drivabilitymay be affected by different factors such as time of day, sea- son and current weather conditions, which the navigation system cannot judge or take into account.

Route guidance 97

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Route guidance to a destination that is not on a digitized road

Example: route guidance to an off-road destination : Off-road destination ; Off-road route section (blue dashes) = Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-

angle indicates the vehicles direction of travel)

? Off-road (if available) COMAND can guide you to destinations which are within the area of the digital map, but which are not themselves recorded on the map. These destinations are known as off-road destinations, which you can enter using the map, for example. In these cases, COMAND guides you for as long as possible with navi- gation announcements and displays on roads known to the system. If the vehicle reaches an areawhich is not part of the digital map, the display appears as a split-screen view. On the right, an arrow appears that points to off-road destina- tion:. You will hear the announcement: "Please follow the arrow on the display". As the vehicle approaches the destination, the Area of destination reached message appears.

Route guidance from an off-road loca- tion to a destination If the vehicle position is within the area cov- ered by the digital map, but the map does not contain any information about that location, the vehicle is in an off-road location.

COMAND is also able to guide you to a des- tination even from an off-road location. At the start of route guidance, you will see the Off Mapped Road message, an arrow and the distance to the destination. The arrow shows the compass heading to the actual destination. The route is highlighted blue, starting from the last recognized street the vehicle was on before it left the map. As soon as the vehicle is back on a road known to the system, route guidance contin- ues in the usual way.

Route guidance from an off-map loca- tion to a destination If the vehicle position is outside the area cov- ered by the digital map, then the vehicle is in an off-map location. COMAND is also able to guide you to a destination even from an off- map location. At the start of route guidance, you will see the Off Mapped Road message, an arrow and the distance to the destination. The direction arrow shows the compass heading to the des- tination. The route is highlighted in blue from the near- est road known to the system. As soon as the vehicle is back on a road known to the system, route guidance contin- ues in the usual way.

Off-road during route guidance Due to road works, for example, there may be differences between the data on the digital map and the actual course of the road. In such cases, the system will temporarily be unable to locate the vehicle position on the digital map. The vehicle is therefore in an off- road position. In the display, you will see the Off Mapped Road message, an arrow and the distance to the destination. The direction arrow shows the compass heading to the destination.

98 Route guidance Na

vi ga tio

n

As soon as the system can assign the vehicle position to the map again, route guidance continues in the usual way.

Traffic reports

Prerequisites i This function is currently not available for Canada.

To receive real-time traffic reports via satel- lite radio, you require: Roptional satellite radio equipment Ra subscription to SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio Traffic Message Service

Further information on satellite radio (Y page 190). COMAND can receive traffic reports via sat- ellite radio and take account of these for route guidance in the navigation system. Received traffic reports are displayed on the map either as text or as symbols.

Real-time traffic reports on the map

: Delimits the section of the route affected ; Indicates an incident on the route (traffic

flow) = Destination ? Map scale COMAND can show certain traffic incidents on the map. Traffic reports are shown on the map at scales of 0.05 mi to 20 mi.

X To hide themenu: slide ZV the COMAND controller and, when the Full Screen menu item is shown, pressW to confirm. The map can be seen in the full-screen dis- play.

X Turn cVd the COMAND controller until the desired map scale is set.

Traffic reports 99

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Symbols used in real-time traffic reports Unimpeded traffic flow Green line with arrows The arrows can be seen on a map scale of 200 m (0.25 mi) and smaller. Heavy/slow-moving traffic Together with a yellow line The symbol marks average speeds of 25 45 mph (40 72 km/h). Caution, traffic incident

Traffic jam Together with a red line and arrows The symbol marks average speeds of 5 - 20 mph (8 - 32 km/h). The arrows can be seen on a map scale of 200 m (0.25 mi) and smaller. Warning message Together with a red/white striped line and arrows The arrows can be seen on a map scale of 200 m (0.25 mi) and smaller. Blocked route section Possibly in combination with X X X X

Displaying real-time traffic reports

Starting a search for traffic reports X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Traffic by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. A menu appears. If No Traffic Messages appears, this means either: Rno traffic reports have been received yet, or Rno traffic reports are available.

X To end the search: select Cancel and pressW to confirm.

X To close the report window: select OK and pressW to confirm.

Traffic symbol information

Example display : Affected roads with indication of direction ; Symbol for report type, e.g. traffic flow

message X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

100 Traffic reports Na

vi ga tio

n

X Select Traffic in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Traffic Symbol Information by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Next or Previous by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm in order to continue highlighting traffic symbols.

X To change the map scale: select Map by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You can now zoom in or out of the map.

Example: details on traffic symbol information X To show the detailed view: select Details and pressW to confirm.

X To close the detailed view: slide XVY the COMAND controller.

Displaying reports on the route

: State/province for the calculated route, road designation, direction and reports for the affected road (2/3)

; Section of the road to which the traffic report applies

= Traffic report ? Type of traffic report (slow-moving traffic) X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Traffic in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Messages On Route and pressW to confirm. The traffic report window appears. If there is more than one traffic report for a section of the route, this is indicated by 2/3, for example.

X To scrollwithin a report or to access the next report: turn cVd the COMAND con- troller.

X To return to the report list: slide XVY the COMAND controller.

Traffic reports 101

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Displaying all traffic reports

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Traffic in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select All Messages and pressW to con- firm. A list is shown containing all roads, areas or regions affected by traffic reports. Roads, areas or regions not on the route also appear in the list.

X To show a traffic report: select a road, area or region and pressW to confirm. The traffic report is displayed. Theremay be several traffic reports for the affected road. You can find an example of a traffic report here: (Y page 101).

X To close a report: slide XVY the COMAND controller.

Reading out traffic reports on the route

Introduction The read-aloud function is only availablewhile route guidance is active. It reads out traffic reports affecting the current route.

You can select the following text reader prop- erties: RLanguage (Y page 45) RText reader speed (Y page 44) You can start the text reader function man- ually or set it to automatic.

Starting the text reader function man- ually X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Traffic by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Read out all messages on route and pressW to confirm. COMAND reads out the reports in sequence. i If there are no reports for the route, the Read out all messages on routemenu item is shown in gray and cannot be selec- ted.

X To switch off the read-aloud function: select Cancel Read-Aloud Function and pressW to confirm or press the8 but- ton. COMAND reads out the current report and then exits the read-aloud function.

Automatic read-aloud function X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Traffic by sliding ZV and turning cVd theCOMANDcontroller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Read Traffic Messages Auto matically and pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous state, switch the option on O or off .

102 Traffic reports Na

vi ga tio

n

Recalculating the route dynamically

The route types Dynamic Route and Dynamic Route Only After Request take all relevant traffic messages into account when calculating a route (Y page 62). If you have selected Dynamic Route as the route type, COMAND guides you to your des- tination along the updated route. If you have selected Dynamic Route Only After Request as the route type, a prompt will appear first. You can now decide whether to: Raccept the route suggested by COMAND Rcontinue your original route X To accept the suggested route: pressW the COMAND controller.

X To continue along the original route: select Reject by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

Destination memory

Home address (My Address)

Entering the home address via address entry X Proceed as described under Adopting an address book entry as a home address (Y page 103). Confirm My Address by pressingW.

X To enter the home address for the first time: confirm New Entry by pressingW.

X To change the home address: select Change in the menu showing the home address by turning cVd the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm.

X Confirm New Entry by pressingW. X In both cases, enter the home address as a destination, e.g. as a city, street and house number (Y page 64). Then, save the home address (Y page 69).

Adopting an address book entry as a home address X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation sys- tem menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select From Memory and pressW to con- firm. You will see the destination memory list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2).

Option 1: destination memory list with character bar

X SlideVZ the COMAND controller repeat- edly until the destination memory list appears as a selection list.

Option 2: destination memory list as selection list

Destination memory 103

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

The My Address entry is listed as the first entry in the destination memory. X Select My Address by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. i If you have not yet entered any charac- ters, My Address is automatically highligh- ted in the selection list.

If no home address has been stored yet, you can now assign an address book entry. If a home address already exists, it is displayed and you can alter it. i If you select New Entry, you are also offered the option of entering the home address for the first time. You can then save the home address without having to start route guidance.

X To enter the home address for the first time: select Assign to Address Book Entry and pressW to confirm.

X Select Home, Work or Not Classified and pressW to confirm.

X To change the home address: select Change and pressW to confirm.

X Select Assign to Address Book Entry and pressW to confirm. i If you select New Entry, you are also offered the option of changing the home address by entering an address. You can

then save the home address without having to start route guidance.

X Select Home, Work or Not Classified and pressW to confirm. In both cases, youwill see the address book either with the character bar or as a selec- tion list.

X Select an address book entry (Y page 148).

X To confirm the selection: pressW the COMAND controller. If there is no existing home address, COMAND saves the entry. You will see a message and then the address menu with the selected address. Start is highlighted automatically. If a home address has already been stored, you will see a prompt asking you whether the My Address entry should be overwrit- ten.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, COMAND overwrites the destination. You will see a message and then the address menu with the selected address. Start is highlighted automati- cally. If you select No, the list will appear again.

Selecting the home address for route guidance X Proceed as described under "Selecting a destination from the destination memory" (Y page 70).

Saving a destination

General notes This function also stores the destination in the address book. When the address book is full, no destinations can be saved in the destination memory. You must first delete address book entries (Y page 148).

104 Destination memory Na

vi ga tio

n

After destination entry X The destination has been entered and is shown in the address entry menu (Y page 64).

X Select Save by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You can now select storing options (Y page 105).

During route guidance X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation sys- tem menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Save Destination and pressW to confirm. You can now select storing options (Y page 105).

From the list of previous destinations X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation sys- tem menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select From Last Destinations and pressW to confirm. The list of last destinations appears.

X Select a destination by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The destination address is shown.

X Select Save and pressW to confirm. You can now select storing options (Y page 105).

Selecting storing options Once you have chosen one of the following options for storing a destination, you can specify storage options: RAfter destination entry (Y page 105) RDuring route guidance (Y page 105) RFrom the list of previous destinations (Y page 70)

Storage options X To save the destinationwithout a name: select Save Without Name and pressW to confirm. COMAND stores the destination in the des- tination memory and uses the address as the destination name.

Example: saving a destination with a name : Selected data field with cursor ; Character bar X To save the destination with a name: select Save With Name and pressW to confirm.

Destination memory 105

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X Select a category, e.g. Home, and pressW to confirm. The input menu appears with data fields and the character bar.

X Proceed as described under "Character entry (navigation)" (Y page 35).

X Then select and pressW to confirm. COMAND stores the destination under the name entered.

An address with complete address data that is suitable for navigation can be assigned to a pre-existing address book entry. X To assign an address to an address book entry: select Assign to Address Book Entry and pressW to confirm.

X Select a category, e.g. Home, and pressW to confirm. You will see the address book either with the character bar or as a selection list.

X Select an address book entry (Y page 148). COMAND stores the data if the address book entry selected does not yet contain navigable address data. If the selected address book entry already contains navigable address data, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to overwrite the existing data.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, COMAND stores the data. You can now start route guidance to this address directly from the address book (Y page 150).

X To save the destination as My address: select Save as "My Address" and press W to confirm. COMAND stores the destination in the des- tination memory as My Address. If the selected address book entry already con- tains address data that can be used for navigation (L icon), a prompt will appear

asking whether you wish to overwrite the existing data.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, the entry is overwritten. If you select No, the process will be canceled.

X To save the destination as a personal POI: insert the SD memory card (Y page 196).

X Select Save As Personal POI and press W to confirm.

X Select a category. X Enter the name. The current address is saved as a personal point of interest on the SD memory card.

Deleting a destination or the home address X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation sys- tem menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select From Memory and pressW to con- firm. You will see the destination memory list either with the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2).

X Option 1: destination memory list with the character bar: enter characters using the character bar (Y page 35).

X Option 2: destination memory list as selection list: select a destination by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You see the address data of the selected entry.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to delete the destination.

106 Destination memory Na

vi ga tio

n

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, COMAND deletes the destination. You will see a message to this effect. If you select No, the process will be can- celed. i If the navigable address data for the des- tination being deleted is also assigned to an address book entry, COMAND will also delete this data from there. If the corre- sponding address book entry does not con- tain any further data, such as telephone numbers, COMAND deletes the entire address book entry.

Previous destinations

Introduction COMAND automatically stores the previous destinations for which route calculation has been started. If the memory is full, COMAND deletes the oldest destination. You can also save a destination from the list of previous destinations in the destinationmemory. It will be stored there permanently.

Storing a destination permanently in the destination memory X Proceed as described in the "From the list of previous destinations" section (Y page 70).

Storing the vehicle position in the list of previous destinations X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Save Vehicle Position and press W to confirm. COMAND stores the current vehicle posi- tion as a destination in the list of previous destinations.

Storing the crosshair position in the list of previous destinations A crosshair appears on the map if you have moved the map manually (Y page 108). You can store the crosshair position as a destina- tion in the list of previous destinations. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Save Crosshair Position and pressW to confirm.

Deleting one of the previous destina- tions X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation sys- tem menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select From Last Destinations and pressW to confirm. The list of last destinations appears.

X Select the desired destination and pressW to confirm. The destination address appears.

Previous destinations 107

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the entry should be deleted.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, the entry is deleted. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

Map operation and map settings

General notes Company logos displayed on the map are trademarks of the respective companies and used solely for the purpose of indicating the locations of these companies. The use of such logos on the map does not indicate approval of, support of or advertising by these compa- nies for the navigation system itself.

Setting the map scale

: Set map scale as a number with unit ; Currently set map scale as indicated by

the needle on the scale bar = New map scale ? Scale bar Unit of measurement: in the COMAND dis- play depends on the selection made in the instrument cluster; see the separate vehicle Operator's Manual. X To hide themenu: slide ZV the COMAND controller and, when the Full Screen menu item is shown, pressW.

X To call up the scale bar: as soon as you turn cVd the COMAND controller, scale bar= appears.

X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.

Moving the map

Showing the crosshair

Map with crosshair : Current vehicle position ; Crosshair = Details of the crosshair position ? Map scale selected X To hide themenu: slide ZV the COMAND controller and, when the Full Screen menu item is shown, pressW.

X To scroll the weather map: slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller. A crosshair appears on themap. If you slide it again, themap under the crosshairmoves in the corresponding direction.

Display= may be the name of a street, for example, provided the digital map contains the necessary data. It shows the geo-coordi- nate position of the crosshair if the Geo- coordinates display is switched on (Y page 111).

Hiding the crosshair and centering the map on the vehicle position or destina- tion X Press the% back button twice. The crosshair disappears and the map is set to the vehicle position.

108 Map operation and map settings Na

vi ga tio

n

Centering themap on the vehicle's posi- tion X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Vehicle Position Map and press W to confirm or, if the crosshair is shown, press the% back button. This hides the crosshair.

Centering the map on the destination position This function requires a calculated route to a destination. If the route includes way points and an intermediate stop, themap can also be set to these positions. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Destination Position Map and pressW to confirm. The crosshair position is set to the relevant destination.

Map settings

Calling up the map settings menu X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Settings and pressW to con- firm. The map settings menu appears.

Map orientation

Example: map orientation : Current map orientation (0 or) Possible map orientations: R0 North orientation (The map view is dis- played so that north is always up) R Heading orientation (the map view is aligned to the direction of travel. The direc- tion of travel is always at the top, the orange-color tip of the symbol points north.) R Bird's-eye view (the map view is aligned to the direction of travel. The map projec- tion reproduces the curvature of the earth's surface, the orange-color tip of the symbol points north.) R 3D map (the map view is aligned to the direction of travel. At a scale of 1 km the map displays elevation, the orange-color tip of the symbol points north.)

Map orientation menu Setting the map orientation X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

Map operation and map settings 109

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Settings and pressW to con- firm. The map settings menu appears.

X Select Map Orientation and pressW to confirm.

X Select North Up, Heading Up, Bird's- eye View or 3-D Map by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. A # dot indicates the new setting.

Selecting POI symbols

Setting the POI symbol display You can set the points of interest you wish to have displayed as symbols on themap. Points of interest are, for example, gas stations, hotels, cinemas and restaurants. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Settings and pressW to con- firm. The map settings menu appears.

X Select POI Symbols On Map and pressW to confirm.

The following settings are possible: RDefault Symbols

Symbol display determined by the factory settings. RPersonal Symbols You can determine the symbols yourself. RNo Symbols The map does not show any symbols.

X Select Default Symbols, Personal Sym bols or No Symbols. If you select Personal Symbols, the POI list appears.

X To switch the symbol display on/off: select a POI by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous state of the symbols, they will either be shown O or hidden . You can switch on the symbol displays formore than one point of interest.

X To switch all personal symbols on/off: select All and pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous status of the symbols, they will either be shown O or hidden . If the function is switched on O, the indi- vidual POIs are grayed out and the previ- ously selected settings remain unchanged. If the function is switched off , you can reselect the individual POIs. They show the most recently selected settings. i The list shows all symbols that are con- tained on the digital map across all coun- tries. However, not all points of interest are available in all countries. As a result, certain point of interest symbols may not be dis-

110 Map operation and map settings Na

vi ga tio

n

played on the map, even if the symbol dis- play is switched on.

X To exit the menu: press the k back button.

Selecting map information Map information in the display During route guidance, you can have map information shown at the bottom edge of the display. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Settings and pressW to con- firm. The map settings menu appears.

X Select Text Information On Map and pressW to confirm. A # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select Current Street, Geo-coordi nates or None and pressW to confirm.

X To exit themenu: slide XVY the COMAND controller.

Road display : Road names or numbers, e.g. for high-

ways

Geo-coordinate display : Current height above average sea level

(rounded to the nearest 10 m) ; Current vehicle position: latitude coordi-

nates = Current vehicle position: longitude coor-

dinates ? Number of GPS satellites currently being

used There must be sufficient GPS reception for all displays to be shown. If this is not the case, the display will be grayed out. Height dis- play: may vary from the actual value, because the navigation system uses the GPS signals for the calculation. During the "Move map" function, you will see the geo-coordinates of the crosshair position. Height display: and number of satellites used? are not displayed.

Display switched off : Current map orientation While moving the map, you will see additional data, depending on the crosshair position, if the digital map supports this data. A street name, for example, can be shown here (Y page 108).

Coordinates on the map X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

Map operation and map settings 111

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Settings and pressW to con- firm. The map settings menu appears.

X Select Compass On Map and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select Never, When Off-Road or When Route Guidance Inactive and pressW to confirm. The selected setting is accepted.

Switching additional information on/off Switching the topographic map on/off X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Settings and pressW to con- firm. The map settings menu appears.

X Select Topographic Map and pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous status, switch the option on O or off .

The topographical map uses different colors to depict elevation. The color key generally reflects the topography's dominant vegeta- tion or the ground's perceived color when seen from the air, for example: Rgreen (grass) for lowland Ryellow, brown (woodland) for hills Rgray (stone) and white (snow) for moun- tains

Example: highway information Switching highway information on/off When driving on the highway, you can see the following information on the right of the dis- play: Rthe nearest gas stations Rthe nearest rest areas, etc. Rand their distance from the current vehicle position The entries show the number of the high- way and the highway exits as well as their distance from the current vehicle position. The name of the highway exit continues to be displayed.

X To switch to navigation mode: press the button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Settings and pressW to con- firm. The map settings menu appears.

X Select Highway Information and press W to confirm. Depending on the previous status, switch the option on O or off .

112 Map operation and map settings Na

vi ga tio

n

Example: city model Switching city view on/off When the city model is switched on, the map shows buildings in 3D. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Settings and pressW to con- firm. The map settings menu appears.

X Select City (3D) and pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous status, switch the option on O or off .

i The city model is only shown for "Bird's- eye View" or "3D Map". It is available in the 0.05mi and 0.1 mi map scales. The data required for displaying buildings is not available for all cities.

Example: intersecting roads on city routes/high- ways Showing/hiding intersecting streets If route guidance is inactive, intersecting streets can be shownon the upper edge of the display. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Settings and pressW to con- firm. The map settings menu appears.

X Select Next Intersecting Street and pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous status, switch the option on O or off .

Map operation and map settings 113

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Traffic information on the map

: Delimits the section of the route affected ; Indicates an incident on the route (traffic

flow) If you subscribe to the SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio Traffic Message Service, traffic infor- mation can be displayed on the map. You can select three categories for the display. X To switch the display on/off: pressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Traffic Information On Map and pressW to confirm.

X Select Incidents and/or Speed & Flow and/or Free Flow and pressW to con- firm. Depending on the previous status, switch the option on O or off .

Traffic information

Display on the map

Incidents Road sections with traffic incidents are illustrated with a yellow line and arrows.

Speed & Flow

Road sections with traffic jams are represented by yel- low or red lines. Yellow lines: traffic jams, average speed 25 - 45 mph (40 - 72 km/h) Red lines: traffic jams, aver- age speed 5 - 20 mph (8 - 32 km/h)

Free Flow Free flowing road sections are illustrated with a green line and arrows.

Additional settings

Avoiding an area

General information COMAND enables you to avoid areas you do not wish to drive through. If you activate or deactivate a route block while route guidance is active, COMAND will calculate a new route. If you activate or deac- tivate a route block while route guidance is inactive, COMANDwill use the new setting for the next route guidance. The calculated route may include an area to be avoided if: Ryour destination is located in such an area. Rthe route uses roads that lead through an area to be avoided.

i Highwayswithin blocked areas are always taken into consideration in the route cal- culation.

114 Additional settings Na

vi ga tio

n

Defining an area for the first time X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Avoid Area and pressW to con- firm. If you have not previously blocked an area, a menu appears.

X Select Using Map, From Memory or From Personal POIs and pressW to confirm. If you select Using Map, the map with the crosshair appears. If you select From Memory or From Per sonal POIs, either the destination mem- ory or the list of categories for POIs appears. RDestination memory (Y page 70) RList of categories for personal POIs (Y page 85)

X Select the desired destination or personal POI and pressW to confirm.

X When the destination address is displayed, select Continue and pressW to confirm. The map appears.

The crosshair marks the center of the area that is to be avoided. X To scroll the weather map: slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller.

X To set the map scale: as soon as you turn cVd the COMAND controller, the scale bar appears. Turning clockwise zooms out from the map; turning counter-clockwise zooms in.

X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set. X To apply a block: pressW the COMAND controller. A red square appears on the map.

X To adjust the size of the square: turn cVd the COMAND controller. The square is enlarged or reduced.

X To confirm the settings: pressW. The list appears. The previously selected area to be avoided has been added and activated.

You can also determine additional areas to be avoided (Y page 115).

Defining further areas X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Avoid Area and pressW to con- firm. If you have already selected one or more areas to avoid, a list of areas appears.

Additional settings 115

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Example: list of areas

i Available positions in the list are named Empty and are shown in grey.

X Select Avoid New Area by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select Using Map, From Memory or From Personal POIs and pressW to confirm. If you select Using Map, the map with the crosshair appears. If you select From Memory or From Per sonal POIs, either the destination mem- ory or the list of categories for POIs appears. RDestination memory (Y page 70) RList of categories for personal POIs (Y page 85)

X Select the desired destination or personal POI and pressW to confirm.

X When the destination address is displayed, select Continue and pressW to confirm. The map appears.

X To avoid a newarea: call up the areamenu again (Y page 115).

Switching an avoided area on/off X Call up the area list (Y page 115). X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The avoided area is switched on O or off depending on the previous status.

Displaying and changing an avoided area X Call up the area list (Y page 115). X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X SlideVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Display / Change and pressW to confirm. The area to be avoided is indicated in the map.

X To change the location of the area: slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND control- ler. The area is moved on the map.

X To adjust the size of the area: turn cVd the COMAND controller. The area is enlarged or reduced.

X To confirm the change: pressW the COMAND controller. The list appears and the change is entered.

Deleting a set area X Call up the area list (Y page 115). X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X SlideVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A query appears asking whether the entry should be deleted.

116 Additional settings Na

vi ga tio

n

X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, the entry is deleted. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

SIRIUS XM service

Displaying SIRIUS XM service informa- tion You can display the SIRIUS XM service infor- mation. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select SIRIUS Service and pressW to confirm. The window on the right half of the display shows the telephone number of the pro- vider (SIRIUS XM) and the serial number of your service module.

Registering for the SIRIUS XM traffic report service X Call the traffic report provider's phone number shown on the screen. i You can also have the satellite service activated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS XM Radio website at http://www.sirius.com (USA).

Once the connection has been established: X Follow the instructions of the operator. The activation process may take up to ten minutes.

If registration is not included when purchas- ing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account.

Compass function You can view the current direction of travel, the current height and the coordinates of the current vehicle position in the compass view. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Compass and pressW to confirm.

Example: compass : Current direction of travel ; Current height above average sea level

(rounded) = Current vehicle position: longitude coor-

dinates ? Number of GPS satellites currently being

used A Current vehicle position: latitude coordi-

nates B Currently set steering angle of the front

wheels

i To display current elevation;, the sys- tem must be able to receive at least four satellites. Steering angleB can be a max- imum of 35 in both directions.

X Toexit thedisplay: confirm Backby press- ingW or press the% back button.

Additional settings 117

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Country-specific information You can call up information on the traffic con- ditions in the country you are currently driving in via the COMAND Internet and online func- tion. The availability of information is country- dependent. Information can include maxi- mum speeds, driving with low-beam head- lamps or legal alcohol limits, for example. X To switch to navigation mode: press the

button. X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Position in the navigation system menu bar by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Country Information and press W to confirm. When the connection has been made, the available country information appears.

X To return to navigation: press the% button.

Displaying the map data version

X To show the map data menu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Version and pressW to con- firm. The number of the map data version is shown. Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Updating the digital map

Important safety notes

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces with- out sufficient ventilation.

Introduction The digital maps generated by the map soft- ware become outdated in the same way as conventional road maps. Optimal route guid- ance can only be provided by the navigation system in conjunction with the most up-to- date map software. Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You can have the dig- ital map updated there with a DVD, or you can update it yourself.

Carrying out a manual update

i The update process can take a long time (over an hour), depending on the size of the digital map. During this time, you will only be able to switch on radio mode and to accept incoming calls. The update will be completed more quickly if the vehicle is stationary. If you start the update with the engine switched off and the starter battery has insufficient power, COMANDmay automat- ically switch off. This protects the battery. If

118 Additional settings Na

vi ga tio

n

this occurs, restart the update with the engine running.

X Insert the DVD (Y page 196). COMAND checks whether the digital map on the DVD is compatible with the naviga- tion system and system software. A prompt then appears asking if you want to install the database. Versions of the database currently installed and the data- base that is to be installed are displayed.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. After selecting Yes, an activation code must be enteredwhen installing a database for the first time. You will receive the acti- vation code when you buy the navigation DVD. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

X Enter the activation code. After entering the activation code cor- rectly, COMAND starts updating the digital map. Once the update is finished, you will see a message.

X To confirm the message: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Take the DVD out of the slot. While the update is running, you will see a message to this effect and a progress bar. The navigation system is not operational until the update is complete. i You cannot eject the DVD during the update. If you switch off COMAND during the update, the update is interrupted. It then continues from where it was interrup- ted when the system is restarted.

COMANDmay prompt you to change the DVD during the update. X Press the8 load/eject button. X Take the DVD out of the slot. X Insert the requested DVD. Once the update has been successfully completed, you will see a message to this effect.

X To confirm the message: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Take the DVD out of the slot. The update is complete. If the update is not successfully completed, youwill see amessage that themap update is not possible.

X To confirm the message: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Take the DVD out of the slot.

Additional settings 119

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Problems with the navigation system

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

COMAND is unable to continue route guid- ance after the journey has been interrupted.

Route guidance is canceled if you interrupt the journey for more than two hours. "Interrupting the journey" refers to stopping the vehicle. "Continuing route guidance" refers to switching COMAND back on and driving on. X Continue route guidance (Y page 92).

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

COMAND is unable to determine the vehicle's position.

COMAND has to redetermine the position of the vehicle if the vehicle has been transported. Example: RAfter transporting the vehicle by ferry RAfter transporting the vehicle by motorail RAfter the vehicle has been towed X Start the vehicle and pull away. COMAND determines the vehicle's position. Depending on the driving situation, this may take some time. Route guidance may be restricted during the determination of the vehicle's position. When positioning is complete, route guidance is resumed with navigation announcements and route guidance displays.

120 Problems with the navigation system Na

vi ga tio

n

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The Navigation Unavailable message appears.

COMAND has an integrated hard drive on which the digital map is stored. To protect the integrated hard drive against damage, COMAND deactivates it at very high and low temperatures. The navigation system will then be temporarily unavailable. X Let the vehicle and COMAND cool down. X To hide the message: switch COMAND off and then on again.

If an area of the hard disk has a malfunction, COMAND can no longer access the map data in this area. This may occur when calculating a route, for example. X To hide the message: switch COMAND off and then on again. The navigation system will be operational again until it has to access the faulty area of the hard drive oncemore. Themessage will then reappear.

X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

You see a message informing you that the DVD containing the dig- italmap is incompatible with the system soft- ware.

The DVD containing the digital map cannot be used for the update. X To confirm the message: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Eject the DVD. X Have the system database checked at an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The map software update has failed.

The DVD is dirty. X Clean the DVD. X Restart the update.

The DVD is scratched. X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

There is overheating due to excessive temperatures in the vehicle interior. X Wait until the vehicle interior has cooled down. X Restart the update.

COMAND's integrated hard disk is defective. X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Problems with the navigation system 121

Na vi ga tio

n

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

COMAND asks for an activation code during the map update.

The digital map is secured with an activation code. X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

122 Problems with the navigation system Na

vi ga tio

n

Your COMAND equipment ................ 124 General notes .................................... 124 Telephony via theBluetooth inter- face .................................................... 125 Reception and transmission vol- ume .................................................... 131 Using the telephone ......................... 132 Using the phone book ...................... 136 Using call lists ................................... 140 Using the speed dial list ................... 142 Text messages .................................. 144 Using the address book ................... 146

123

Te le ph on e

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described.

General notes

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equip- ment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

If you make a call on your mobile phone while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only use the mobile phone when road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdic- tions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) per second. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. There is scientific discussion surrounding the possible health risks posed by electromag- netic fields. You can reduce this risk by using an exterior antenna. Therefore, only use mobile communication equipment if it is connected to the exterior antenna of the vehicle.

Introduction COMAND provides telephony via the Blue- tooth interface. When connecting Bluetooth-capable mobile phones with PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile), the contacts are automatically down- loaded to COMAND. With a suitablemobile phone, you can use the hands-free system and receive vCards via the Bluetooth interface. You can use the text message function (receiving and reading) if the mobile phone supports the MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth profile. You can obtain more detailed information about suitable mobile phones and about con- necting Bluetooth-capablemobile phones to COMAND on the Internet at http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) for the USA or at 1-800-387-0100 for Canada.

Call disconnectionwhile the vehicle is in motion A call may be disconnected if: Rthere is insufficient network coverage in certain areas. Ryou move from one transmitter/receiver area (cell) into another and no channels are free. Ryou use a SIM card which is not compatible with the network available.

Operating options You can operate the telephone by: Rusing the COMAND controller: turn c V d

slide XVY or ZV

124 General notes Te le ph on e

pressW Rusing the6 or~ button and using the telephone keypad on COMAND Rusing the6 or~ button on the mul- tifunction steering wheel Rusing the Voice Control System (see the separate Voice Control System operating instructions)

Unless stated otherwise, the descriptions and illustrations in this section refer to COMAND.

Function restrictions The telephone is not ready for use in the fol- lowing situations: RThe telephone automatically tries to log on to a network. If no network is available, you may not be able to make a "911" emer- gency call. If you attempt to make an out- going call, the No Service message will appear for a short while.

"911" emergency call The 911 emergency call is a public service. Using it without due cause is a criminal offense. The following requirements must be fulfilled for a 911 emergency call: Rthe mobile phone must be switched on. Ra network must be available. Ra valid and operational SIM card must be inserted in the mobile phone. Rthemobile phone is connected toCOMAND via Bluetooth.

If you cannot make an emergency call, you must arrange rescue measures yourself.

X Enter the number on COMAND (Y page 132).

X Press6. The telephone makes the connection.

X Wait until the emergency call center answers and describe the emergency sit- uation.

Telephony via the Bluetooth inter- face

Prerequisites For telephony via COMAND's Bluetooth interface, a Bluetooth-capable mobile phone is required. On COMAND X Activate the Bluetooth function in COMAND (Y page 45).

On the mobile phone X Switch on the mobile phone and enter the PIN when prompted to do so (see the mobile phone operating instructions).

X Activate Bluetooth functions and, where necessary, Bluetooth visibility on the mobile phone (see the mobile phone oper- ating instructions).

The battery of the mobile phone should always be kept sufficiently charged in order to prevent malfunctions. In preparation for telephoning via the Blue- tooth interface, you should check the fol- lowing items on your mobile phone (see the mobile phone operating instructions): RHands-Free Profile The mobile phone must support Hands- Free Profile 1.0 or above. RBluetooth visibility On certain mobile phones, the device itself must be made "visible" to other devices, as well as activating the Bluetooth function (see the mobile phone operating instruc- tions).

Telephony via the Bluetooth interface 125

Te le ph on e

Z

This visibility is for restricted periods of time on some mobile phones. RBluetooth device name Every Bluetooth device has its own Blue- tooth device name. This device name is freely definable, but can be identical for all devices from the same manufacturer. It is therefore recommended that you change this name so that you can easily recognize your mobile phone (see the mobile phone operating instructions).

i Not all mobile phones available on the market are equally suitable. You can obtain more detailed information about suitable mobile phones and about connecting Blue- tooth-capable mobile phones to COMAND on the Internet at http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Cus- tomer Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).

i Some displays (e.g. the signal strength) depend on the supported version of the Hands-Free Profile.

Connecting a mobile phone

General information Before using your mobile phone with COMAND for the first time, you will need to: Rsearch for it (Y page 127) and then Rauthorize (register) it (Y page 128). When you authorize a new mobile phone, it is connected automatically. You can authorize up to 15 mobile phones.

If the mobile phone supports PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Access Profile), the following contacts and messages are downloaded into COMAND when connecting: Rphone book Rcall lists Rtext messages Further information on the conditions for con- necting (Y page 125).

126 Telephony via the Bluetooth interface Te le ph on e

Searching for a mobile phone

Empty Bluetooth telephone list

Conditions for searching

Bluetooth telephone list after search is comple- ted X Press the % function button on COMAND.

X Select Connect Dev. from the telephone basic menu by slidingV and turning cVd theCOMANDcontroller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Search for Phone from Vehicle and press theW button to confirm. A message appears.

X Select Start Search and press theW button to confirm. The Searching for Bluetooth Phones... message appears. COMAND looks for Bluetooth telephones within range and adds them to the Bluetooth tel- ephones list. If a new phone is found, it appears in the list with the symbol. The duration of the search depends on the number of Bluetooth telephones within range and their characteristics.

Symbols in the Bluetooth phone list

Sym- bol

Explanation

New mobile phone in range, but not yet authorized

Y Authorized mobile phone

# Currently connected mobile phone

Mobile phone in range and authorized

(gray)

Mobile phone not in range, but already authorized

The Bluetooth telephone list shows all mobile phones within range and all previously authorized mobile phones, whether or not they are in range.

i If the Bluetooth telephones list is already full, you will be requested to de-authorize a mobile phone (Y page 130). If COMAND does not find your mobile phone, external authorization may be necessary (Y page 129).

i If you call up the telephone list again, the unauthorized devices are removed from the

Telephony via the Bluetooth interface 127

Te le ph on e

Z

list. In this case, start a new search to update the Bluetooth telephone list.

Authorizing (registering) a mobile phone

Passkey entry

Telephone basic menu Option 1: using the passkey (access code) X Select the mobile phone using the symbol in the Bluetooth telephone list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The input menu for the passkey appears.

The passkey is any one to sixteen-digit num- ber combination which you can choose your- self. You must enter the same number com- bination in COMAND and in the Bluetooth- capable mobile phone (see the mobile phone operating instructions).

i Some mobile phones require a passkey with four or more digits.

i If you want to reauthorize a mobile phone following deauthorization, you can select a different passkey.

i Mercedes-Benz recommends de-authori- zation in COMAND and on the mobile phone (Y page 130). Subsequent authori- zation may otherwise fail.

X To enter the passkey in COMAND: press the number keys one after the other.

or X Select the digits in the digit bar one by one by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. is highlighted after the first number has been entered.

X In both cases, select and pressW to confirm.

X To enter the passkey on the mobile phone: if the Bluetooth connection is suc- cessful, you will be requested to enter the passkey (access code, passcode; see the mobile phone operating instructions).

X Enter the same passkey in the mobile phone as the one already entered in COMAND. The Connecting Bluetooth Pro files... message appears. The Authorization successful mes- sage appears once authorization is com- pleted.

The mobile phone is connected to COMAND (authorized). You can now make phone calls using the COMAND hands-free system.

i After entering the passkey, you may also need to enter a confirmation in your mobile phone to connect calls. Please check your mobile phone display. On some mobile phones, this confirmation can be saved. In this case, you do not need to enter it again. If the COMAND display shows the Author ization failed message, you may have exceeded the prescribed time period. Repeat the procedure.

128 Telephony via the Bluetooth interface Te le ph on e

Option 2: use Secure Simple Pairing The mobile phone (or the Bluetooth audio device) must support the Bluetooth version 2.1 for connection via Secure Simple Pairing. COMAND creates a six-digit code, which is displayed on both devices that are to be con- nected. X If the code is the same on both devices, confirm Yes by pressingW. If you select Yes, authorization is continued and the mobile phone is connected. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

X Confirm the message on the mobile phone.

External authorization

If COMAND does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone. In this case, you can test if your mobile phone can find COMAND. The Bluetooth device name for COMAND is MB Bluetooth. Please note the following: some mobile phones require that you establish the con-

nection to COMAND again once you have entered the passkey (see the mobile phone operating instructions). The mobile phone cannot otherwise be authorized. X Press the % function button on COMAND.

X Select Connect Device from the tele- phone basic menu by slidingV and turn- ing c V d the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The Bluetooth telephone list appears.

X Select Connect via Phone and pressW to confirm. The message on the left appears.

X Start the Bluetooth search on the mobile phone; see the mobile phone operating instructions.

X Select COMAND (MB Bluetooth) on the mobile phone.

X Option 1: when requested to do so, enter the passkey first on the mobile phone and then in COMAND.

X Option 2: confirm the displayed codes on the mobile phone and in COMAND (Secure Simple Pairing). With both options, you see the prompt Do you want to be authorized? on the COMAND display.

X If you select Yes, the mobile phone will be authorized. The messages Waiting for a Connection to// and Connecting Bluetooth Profiles... are displayed. If the connec- tion is successful, you see the telephone basic menu and the connected mobile phone is entered. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

Switching between mobile phones If you have authorized more than one mobile phone, you can switch between the individual phones.

Telephony via the Bluetooth interface 129

Te le ph on e

Z

X Select the mobile phone in the Bluetooth telephone list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The selected mobile phone is searched for and connected if it is within Bluetooth range and if Bluetooth is activated. Only one mobile phone can be connected at any one time. The currently connected mobile phone is indicated by the # dot in the Bluetooth telephones list.

i You can only switch to another authorized mobile phone if you are not currently mak- ing a call.

De-authorizing (de-registering) amobile phone Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC recommends de- authorization in COMAND and on the mobile phone. Subsequent authorization may other- wise fail. X Press the % function button on COMAND.

X Select Connect Device from the tele- phone basic menu by slidingV and turn- ing c V d the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The Bluetooth telephone list appears (Y page 127).

X Select the desired mobile phone in the Bluetooth telephones list.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to deauthorize this device.

X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, the device will be deleted from the Bluetooth telephones list. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

i Before re-authorizing the mobile phone, you should also delete the device name MB Bluetooth from your mobile phone's Blue- tooth list.

Displaying connection details X Press the % function button on COMAND.

X Select Connect Dev. from the telephone basic menu by slidingV and turning cVd theCOMANDcontroller and pressW to confirm. The Bluetooth telephone list appears.

X Select the desired mobile phone in the Bluetooth telephones list.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

X Select Details and pressW to confirm. The following information concerning the selected mobile phone is shown: RBluetooth name RBluetooth address Ravailability status (shown after a new search) Rauthorization status

X To close the detailed view: turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller.

130 Telephony via the Bluetooth interface Te le ph on e

Telephone basic menu (Bluetooth interface)

Basic menu display

Telephone basic menu (Bluetooth interface) : Telephone status ; Signal strength of mobile phone network

= Receiver icon or ? To display call lists A Character bar B Bluetooth name of the currently connec-

ted mobile phone C To display the COMAND phone book X Press the % function button. When the connectedmobile phone is ready for use, the telephone basic menu appears. i Display; may vary, depending on the mobile phone connected. Bars; show the current signal strength of the mobile phone network. If all bars are filled, you have optimum reception. If no bars are shown, reception is either very poor or there is none at all. Receiver icon shows whether a call is active/being connected or not.

Text message display in the telephone basic menu The Text Message menu item is only availa- ble if the Bluetooth phone supports theMAP Bluetooth profile (Message Access Profile). The downloading of text messages from the

Bluetooth phone must have been comple- ted. The menu item is otherwise grayed out. Further information on text messages (Y page 144). If you have an unread text message, the 1 mail symbol is displayed. The symbol disap- pears once you have read the text message. Themail symbol is displayed as soon as the text message memory is full. The symbol disappears once you delete at least one text message.

Reception and transmission volume

Once the mobile phone has been authorized, you can optimize the transmission and recep- tion volume settings. Find out more about the optimum settings for your mobile phone online at http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- tance center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA) or Customer Rela- tions at 1-800-387-0100 (Canada).

X Press the % function button. X Select Connect Dev. in the telephone basic menu by slidingV and turning cVd theCOMANDcontroller and pressW to confirm.

X Select an authorized mobile phone from the list by turning cVd.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

Reception and transmission volume 131

Te le ph on e

Z

X Select Reception Volume or Transmis sion Volume and pressW to confirm.

X Select a volume setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X To close the setting scale: pressW or slide X V Y.

i Incorrect settings may have an impact on the quality of calls.

Using the telephone

Incoming call

Accepting a call

Example: incoming call X To accept: confirm Accept by pressingW. or X Press the6 button on COMAND or on the multifunction steering wheel. i You can also accept the call by voice com- mand using the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions).

Once you have accepted the call, you can use hands-free mode. The call volume can be adjusted (Y page 30). Other functions during a call (Y page 133) If the phone number of the caller is transfer- red, it appears in the display. If an entry for the caller exists in the phone book, you will also see the name. If the phone number is not transferred or the "Hide data" function is activated, Unknown appears in the display.

i You can also accept a call as described above when another main function is switched on in COMAND. Once you have accepted the call, the display switches to the telephone display. After the call is fin- ished, you see the display of the previous main application again. The display does not switch to telephone mode if you: Rpress the% back button next to the COMAND controller and then Raccept the call using the6 button on the multifunction steering wheel

Rejecting a call X To reject: select Reject by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

or X Press the~ button on COMAND or on the multifunction steering wheel.

Making a call

Using the number keypad X Call up the telephone basic menu (Y page 131).

X Enter the digits using the number keypad. X To connect the call: press the6 but- ton on COMAND or on the multifunction steering wheel.

Using the telephone basic menu X Call up the telephone basic menu (Y page 131).

X Select the digits one by one by turningcVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

132 Using the telephone Te le ph on e

X To make a call: select in the character bar and pressW to confirm.

or X Press the6 button on COMAND or on the multifunction steering wheel.

Redialing X Call up the telephone basic menu (Y page 131).

X Select in the character bar and pressW to confirm.

or X If the telephone basic menu is displayed, press the6 button on COMAND. In both cases, the calls dialed list appears. The most recently dialed number is at the top.

X To select a call: turn cVd the COMAND controller.

X To connect the call: pressW the COMAND controller.

Using the call list or COMAND phone book X Open a call list and select an entry (Y page 140).

or X Call up the COMAND phone book and select an entry (Y page 137).

X To make a call: pressW the COMAND controller or the6 button.

Making a call via speed dial The speed dial list contains stored entries from the phone book (Y page 142). Option 1: X Hold down one of the number keys for lon- ger than two seconds. The telephone basic menu displays the selected entry. This initiates dialing.

Option 2: X Call up the telephone basic menu (Y page 131).

X Select Call Lists by slidingV and turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select Speed Dial Preset List by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The speed dial list appears.

X Select preset and pressW to confirm. The telephone basic menu displays the selected entry. This initiates dialing.

Functions available during a call

Overview

Telephone operation with a single call : Person you are calling ; Symbol for active telephone connection = To switch the microphone on/off

(Y page 134) ? To send DTMF tones (not possible with all

mobile phones) (Y page 134) A To end a call Available functions: RAccepting a waiting call (Y page 134) RMaking a second call (Y page 135) RCall waiting (Y page 135) Availability depends on the network (only pos- sible in the GSM network) and on the Blue- tooth mobile phone.

Using the telephone 133

Te le ph on e

Z

Switching the microphone on/off This function is also available during an active phone call. X Call up the telephone basic menu (Y page 131).

X To switch off: select Mic Off and pressW to confirm. If the microphone is switched off, the dis- play shows theQ icon, and the The microphone is offmessage appears for a short period.

X To switch on: select Mic on and pressW to confirm. TheQ symbol disappears. You will briefly see the The microphone is onmessage.

Sending DTMF tones

This function is not supported by all mobile phones. Answering machines or other devices can be controlled by DTMF tones, e.g. for remote query functions. X If you would like to listen to the messages on your answering machine, for example, dial the corresponding number.

X To transmit individual characters: once a connection has been established to the answering machine, select the desired

characters in the character bar, pressingW to confirm each of them.

or X Press the corresponding key on the COMAND number keypad. Every character selected will be transmit- ted immediately.

X To send a phone book entry as a DTMF sequence: select Name by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select the desired phone book entry and pressW to confirm. The entry is sent as a DTMF character string.

X To return to the call display: select Back and pressW to confirm.

i You can also send DTMF tones using the Voice Control system; see the separate operating instructions.

Calls with several participants

Rejecting or accepting a waiting call Themobile phone network providermust sup- port and activate the call-waiting function. Depending on the mobile phone used, the system behavior differs when accepting a call. If you have a call in progress and receive another call, a new window appears in the display. You also hear a tone. You can accept or reject the call. X To reject: select Reject and pressW to confirm.

or X Press the~ button on COMAND or on the multifunction steering wheel.

X To accept: select Accept and pressW to confirm.

or X Press the6 button on COMAND or on the multifunction steering wheel.

134 Using the telephone Te le ph on e

The system behavior after accepting the incoming call depends on your mobile phone. RThe mobile phone supports the call waiting function (via Bluetooth) when: The previously active call is held. You can then switch back and forth between both calls (toggling) (Y page 135). RThe mobile phone does not support the call waiting function (via Bluetooth) when: The previously active call is ended. This is also the case if you accept the wait- ing call using the VoiceControl System (see the separate operating instructions).

The COMAND display changes. If you con- tinue to operate functions on the mobile phone, the COMAND display may differ from that of the mobile phone.

Making a second call If the following requirements aremet, you can make another call while on the phone with someone else: RThe function has to be supported by the mobile phone network. RThe mobile phone has to support the con- nection of a further call via Bluetooth. This action puts the previous call on hold if the mobile phone supports this function. RThe appropriate setting has to be activated on the mobile phone.

: Symbol for making a second call

X Select symbol: by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

or X Press the6 button on COMAND. X Enter the phone number: Rmanually (Y page 132) Rusing the phone book (Y page 137) Rusing the call lists (Y page 140) Rusing speed dial (Y page 133)

Call waiting and conference calls You can switch back and forth between two calls with the call waiting function. The func- tion is available if yourmobile phone supports the toggling function (via Bluetooth). You can interconnect various callers to create a conference call with the Conference func- tion. You can use the function if you are answering a second call or making a second call while talking to someone else.

: Active call ; Call on hold = To interconnect the call on hold and the

active call to create a conference call.

Using the telephone 135

Te le ph on e

Z

To switch between the active call and the call on hold (call waiting): X Select call on hold; and pressW to con- firm.

or X Press the6 button on COMAND or on the multifunction steering wheel. The previous call on hold is activated.

X To end the active call: select in the telephone basic menu and pressW to con- firm.

or X Press the~ button on COMAND or on the multifunction steering wheel. The call on hold is activated.

To interconnect the call on hold and the active call to create a conference call: X Select Conference and pressW to con- firm.

To call other participants: X Select symbol: and pressW to confirm. You can now switch between the new par- ticipant and the conference call or add the participant to the conference call.

Switching between a new participant and the conference call: X Select Conference Call and pressW to confirm. You will change to a conference call. The new participant is placed on hold.

Adding a new participant to the conference call: X Select Conference and pressW to con- firm.

Using the phone book

Introduction The phone book displays the names and phone numbers of all address book entries saved in the COMAND address book. If an address book entry does not have a tele- phone number, it does not appear in the phone book. The phone book of the mobile phone is auto- matically downloaded to COMAND after con- nection. In the telephone book, you can: Rsave phone numbers (Y page 139) Rsearch for entries (Y page 137) Rdelete entries (Y page 138) Rimport contacts (Y page 152) Rdelete contacts (Y page 153) Rreceive vCards (Y page 153)

i The stored phone book and the vCards remain in COMAND even if you use

136 Using the phone book Te le ph on e

COMAND with another mobile phone. The entries can be viewed without a mobile phone. For this reason, you should delete any phone book entries before handing over or selling the vehicle.

Calling up the phone book

Opening the phone book X Press the % function button. X Select Name in the telephone basicmenu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If the phone book contains entries, they will be displayed in alphabetical order. The character bar at the bottomof the display is active. The character bar is used for fast selection of an entry. Enter the character using the character bar (Y page 33).

i You can also call up the phone book using the multifunction steering wheel; see the separate vehicle Operator's Manual.

Closing the phone book X Select the& symbol in the character bar by sliding V and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

or X Press the k button.

Symbol overview

Sym- bol

Explanation

Address book entry that has been entered or changed via COMAND Imported contact that has been saved in the phone or address book

\ Address book entry with voice tag These entries have also been assigned a voice tag. Voice tags are available in vehicles with the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions).

Contact that has been imported from a mobile phone that supports PBAP

Entry that has been imported from the memory card or USB device

Entry imported via the Bluetooth interface

Searching for a phone book entry

Using the character bar You determine the first letter of the entry you are looking for with the first character you enter. X Select a character by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The first entry in the list that starts with the letter selected is highlighted. If there are similar entries, the next different character is shown. For example, with entries such as Christel and Christine, the beginnings of the names are similar. In this case, you will be offered a choice between E and I.

Using the phone book 137

Te le ph on e

Z

X Select the characters of the entry you are searching for one by one and pressW to confirm. When the selection is clear, COMAND switches automatically to the selection list.

X To complete the search: slideVZ the COMAND controller repeatedly or press and holdW until the character bar disap- pears. The selection list appears.

Information about character entry (Y page 33)

Using the number keypad You determine the first letter of the entry you are looking for with the first character you enter. X Press the appropriate number keys as many times as necessary and one after the other.

Further information on character entry using the number keypad (direct entry) (Y page 35).

Directly from the list You can switch to the list at any time during character entry. X SlideVZ the COMAND controller repeat- edly or press and holdW until the charac- ter bar disappears.

or X Select and pressW to confirm. X To select an entry: turn cVd the COMAND controller until the desired entry is highlighted and pressW to confirm.

To select a phone number: theG symbol indicates that an entry contains more than one phone number. X Select a phone book entry with theG symbol and pressW to confirm. The sub-entries appear. TheG symbol changes toI.

Phone book entry with several entries X Select a sub-entry by turning cVd and pressW to confirm.

X To return to the phone book using the character bar: select& in the list and pressW to confirm.

or X Press the k button.

Displaying details for an entry X Select an entry in the selection list by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

X Select Details and pressW to confirm. The detailed view appears.

X To close the detailed display: slide XVY repeatedly until the entry is highlighted again.

or X Press the k back button.

Deleting an entry from the phone book If the entry contains only phone numbers, it is deleted from the phone book and address book. If it contains additional data, such as a navi- gable destination, the entry is deleted in the

138 Using the phone book Te le ph on e

phone book. However, the entry is retained in the address book. X Select an entry in the selection list by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the entry should be deleted.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, the entry is deleted in accordancewith the rules described above. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

Creating a new entry in the phone book

X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeat- edly in the phone book until the selection list appears.

X Select the list symbol on the right in the selection list by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select New Entry and pressW to confirm. X Select a category for the number, e.g.Home, and pressW to confirm.

X Select a category for the phone, e.g. Mobile, and pressW to confirm.

X Select Continue and pressW to confirm. The input menu with data fields appears.

: Selected data field with cursor ; Character bar X Enter characters (Y page 33) X To save an entry: select the symbol in the character bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The entry is created in the phone book and in the address book.

Adding to a phone book entry You can add telephone numbers to an exist- ing phone book entry. X Select an entry in the selection list by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

X Select Add Phone No. and pressW to confirm.

X Select a category for the number, e.g.Home, and pressW to confirm.

X Select a category for the phone, e.g. Mobile, and pressW to confirm.

X Select Continue and pressW to confirm. COMAND stores the data if there are fewer than five numbers assigned to the entry you are searching for in the selected number category. If five numbers are stored for the entry in the selected number category, a prompt will appear. You can then choose whether to overwrite one of the existing numbers.

Using the phone book 139

Te le ph on e

Z

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, a selection list will appear containing the five existing numbers. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

X Select the number to be overwritten by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. An input menu appears. The data field for entering the new phone number is high- lighted.

X Enter characters (Y page 33) X Store the entry (Y page 34)

Using call lists

Introduction While the telephone is being used, COMAND stores individual lists for both incoming and outgoing calls (including missed calls). Call lists are not available unless amobile phone is connected to COMAND. COMAND supports the PBAP Bluetooth pro- file. How COMAND processes call lists depends on the model of the mobile phone connected: RBluetooth telephone with PBAP Blue- tooth profile: The call lists are downloaded automatically from the mobile phone by COMAND as soon as the mobile phone is connected to COMAND. RBluetooth telephone without PBAP Blue- tooth profile: COMAND creates the call lists from both incoming and outgoing calls (including missed calls) as soon as the mobile phone is connected to COMAND.

i For Bluetooth telephones without the PBAP Bluetooth profile, the call lists in COMAND are not synchronized with those on your mobile phone. These calls may or

may not be listed on your mobile phone, depending on the model.

i If no mobile phone is connected, then the Call Lists menu item is grayed out and cannot be selected. If you connect amobile phone other than the previous one to COMAND, the previously available call lists and their entries will be deleted automati- cally. They are still available on the mobile phone itself.

i You will only be able to select the respec- tive menu items once calls have been received or dialed from COMAND. Displaying missed calls in the COMAND display is not supported by all mobile phones.

Opening the call list and selecting an entry X Press the % function button. X Select Call Lists in the telephone basic menu by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. A menu appears.

X Select Calls Received or Calls Dialed by turning cVd and pressW to confirm. The corresponding list appears.

i You can also call up the list of dialed calls by pressing the6 button when the tele- phone basic menu is shown. In this case, the list will only show phone numbers.

X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X To dial a phone number: pressW.

X To close the list: select the& symbol and pressW to confirm.

or X Press the k back button.

140 Using call lists Te le ph on e

Displaying details from a list entry COMANDcan also showa shortened list entry in full. X Select a list entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Details and pressW to confirm. The detailed view appears.

X To go back to the list: slide XVY repeat- edly until the list is highlighted.

Storing a phone number

New address book entry For incoming calls from a person who is not in the address book, COMAND displays the phone number in the call list. You can save this entry. X Open a call list and select an entry (Y page 140).

X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

X Select Save and pressW to confirm. X Select New Entry and pressW to confirm. X Select a category for the number, e.g. Home, and pressW to confirm.

X Select a category for the phone, e.g. Mobile, and pressW to confirm.

Number category Display (phone book and address book)

Not Classified No symbol

Home

Work

Telephone cate- gory

Display (phone book and address book)

Not Classified ;

Mobile

Car

Pager

X Select Save and pressW to confirm. An input menu with data fields is shown. The data field for the telephone number is filled in automatically.

: Data field with cursor ; Telephone number and symbol for the

phone category (automatically entered) = Character bar

Adding information to an address book entry For incoming calls from a person who is not in the address book, COMAND displays the phone number in the call list. You can save this entry. X Open a call list and select an entry (Y page 140).

X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

X Select Save and pressW to confirm.

Using call lists 141

Te le ph on e

Z

i Save is shown in gray if the selected list entry has already been saved.

X Select Add Phone No. and pressW to confirm.

X Select a category for the number, e.g.Home, and pressW to confirm.

X Select a category for the phone, e.g. Mobile, and pressW to confirm.

X Select Save. The search menu for address book entries appears.

X Search for the desired entry (Y page 137). X PressWwhen you have finished searching. COMAND stores the data if there are fewer than five numbers assigned to the entry you are searching for in the selected number category. You will see a message to this effect. If five numbers are stored for the entry you are searching for, a prompt will appear ask- ing whether you wish to overwrite one of the existing numbers.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, a selection list with the five existing numbers is displayed. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

X Select the number to be overwritten in the list by turning cVd theCOMANDcontroller and pressW to confirm. COMAND overwrites the selected number with the new data.

Deleting call lists If you are using a Bluetooth phone that does not support the PBAP Bluetooth profile, the call lists are generated and managed by COMAND. You can delete these call lists in COMAND. If you download call lists from a Bluetooth phone that supports the PBAP Bluetooth profile, you cannot delete them from COMAND.

X Select Call Lists in the telephone basic menu by turning cVd the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete Call Lists and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to delete all call lists.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, the call lists are deleted. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

i If you delete these call lists from the mobile phone (see the separate mobile phone operating instructions), COMAND updates the call list display the next time it connects.

Using the speed dial list

Storing an entry You can assign ten speed dial presets (0 9) to the speed dial list. There are two options available for this purpose. Option 1: X Search for a phone book entry in the phone book (Y page 137).

X If an entry has several phone numbers, select the desired number by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select Speed Dial by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. A menu appears.

142 Using the speed dial list Te le ph on e

Speed dial menu X Select Assign Speed Dial Preset and pressW to confirm. The speed dial list appears. The selected phone book entry is listed as the first entry. The next available speed dial preset is high- lighted.

X Select the speed dial preset by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The phone book entry is saved in the speed dial preset.

Option 2 X Call up the telephone basic menu (Y page 131).

X Select Call Lists by slidingV and turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

X Select Speed Dial Preset List and pressW to confirm. The speed dial list appears.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

X Select Assign Speed Dial Preset and pressW to confirm. The speed dial list appears. The selected phone book entry is listed as the first entry. The next available speed dial preset is high- lighted.

X Select the speed dial preset by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The phone book entry is saved in the speed dial preset.

Making a call via speed dial The speed dial list contains stored phone book entries (Y page 142). Option 1: X Hold down one of the number keys for lon- ger than two seconds. The telephone basic menu displays the selected entry. This initiates dialing.

Option 2: X Call up the telephone basic menu (Y page 131).

X Select Call Lists by slidingV and turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The speed dial list appears.

Using the speed dial list 143

Te le ph on e

Z

X Select Speed Dial Preset List by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The speed dial list appears.

X Select preset and pressW to confirm. The telephone basic menu displays the selected entry. This initiates dialing.

Deleting a speed dial number X To delete a speed dial number: select Delete Speed Dial Preset in the "Speed dial" menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The speed dial number is deleted.

X To delete all speed dial numbers: select Delete All Speed Dial Presets in the "Speed dial" menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. You will be asked whether you want to con- tinue.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, all speed dial presets will be deleted from the speed dial list. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

Text messages

Information and requirements In order to be able to use the text message function, themobile phone has to support the MAP Bluetooth profile (Message Access Profile). If the above conditions aremet, new incoming text messages appear in the COMAND text message inbox. The / symbol appears in the status bar. The symbol disappears once you have read the text message. The mail symbol is displayed if the text message memory is full. The symbol is no longer dis-

played once you delete at least one text mes- sage.

i COMAND may not load all of the most recent text messages: This may occur in exceptional cases, for example when using certain mobile phones/brackets and if the mobile phone inbox holds a large number of text mes- sages.

Displaying the text message inbox

Calling up the inbox

Text message inbox X Press the % function button. X Select Txt Msg. in the telephone basic menu by turning cVd the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm. The text message inbox appears.

Reading a text message X Call up the text message (SMS) inbox (Y page 144)

X Select a text message in the text message inbox by turning cVd the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm. The text message appears.

144 Text messages Te le ph on e

X To scroll through the display or select phone numbers in a text message: turn cVd the COMAND controller. The display scrolls up or down line by line, or skips to the next or previous telephone number and automatically highlights it.

X To return to the list: pressW and select Back.

Text message read-aloud function Settings for the read-aloud function: RLanguage (Y page 45) RSpeed (Y page 44) X PressW while a text message is being dis- played, select Read Aloud and pressW to confirm. COMAND reads out the text message.

X To cancel the read-aloud function: press the8 button.

or X PressW, select Cancel Read-Aloud Function and pressW to confirm.

Sender or text display You can switch between displaying the text message sender or the textmessage content. The sender display shows the sender of the text message. If the sender is stored in the COMAND phone book, the name is displayed. The text display shows the first few words of the text message. X Select a text message in the text message inbox by turning cVd the COMAND con- troller.

X To switch to the text display: select the list symbol to the right of the text message by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Display Text and pressW to con- firm. The view changes.

X To switch to the sender display: select the list symbol to the right of the text mes-

sage by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Display Sender and pressW to confirm. The view changes.

X To return to the telephone basic menu: press the k button.

Displaying details and phone numbers COMAND can also show a shortened sender display in full. X Select a text message in the text message inbox by turning cVd the COMAND con- troller.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the text message by slidingVY the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Details and pressW to confirm. The detailed view appears.

X To close the detailed view: slide XVY the COMAND controller.

X To return to the telephone basic menu: press the k button.

Managing text messages

Calling a text message sender X PressW the COMAND controller while the text message is being displayed.

X Select Call Sender and pressW to con- firm. The telephonemakes the call to the sender.

Text messages 145

Te le ph on e

Z

Using phone numbers in the text

: Usable numerical sequence Numbers in text messages that are highligh- ted in red can be used. X Select a usable number when the text mes- sage is displayed.

X PressW the COMAND controller and select Use.

X Select Call. The phone makes the call.

i It is possible that a highlighted numerical sequence may not contain a telephone number.

i You can use the "New entry" or "Add no." functions to save this telephone number or to add it to an existing entry.

Storing the sender of a text message in the address book This function is not available if the senders telephone number is already stored in the address book. X PressW the COMAND controller while the text message is being displayed.

X Select Save Number and pressW to con- firm.

X Select New Entry and pressW to confirm. X Store the phone number (Y page 141)

Adding the sender of a text message to an address book entry X PressW the COMAND controller while the text message is being displayed.

X Select Save Number and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Add Phone No. and pressW to confirm.

X Proceed from the step "Select a number category" (Y page 139).

Deleting a text message X Select a text message in the text message inbox by turning cVd the COMAND con- troller.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the text message by slidingVY the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A deletion prompt appears.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, the text message is deleted. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

i This delete function is not supported by all mobile phones. The Delete failed mes- sage appears.

Using the address book

Introduction Always pay attention to traffic conditions. Before starting the journey, familiarize your- self with the address book functions. Only use COMAND when the road and traffic conditions permit. You could otherwise become involved in an accident in which you or others could be injured. The address book organizes and stores entries that are entered from different sour- ces (mobile phone,memory card, USBdevice, COMAND phone book, navigation system).

146 Using the address book Te le ph on e

You can use these entries to make telephone calls and for navigation.

i Number of contacts in the address book: the address book can store a total of 4000 contacts. 1500 entries each are reserved in the address book for: Rcontacts from the mobile phone Rcontacts that you create in COMAND or import from other sources

The remaining 1,000 entries are assigned by COMAND as necessary.

i Display ofmobile phone contacts: con- tacts downloaded from the mobile phone remain in the address book even if you dis- connect the mobile phone from COMAND. Contacts that have previously been availa- ble can be displayed as soon as the mobile phone is reconnected. COMAND down- loads the contacts again so that any new contacts that have been added to the mobile phone can be displayed. As soon as you connect a new mobile phone to COMAND all the contacts from the previous mobile phone are replaced by those from the new phone's address book. Address book entries remain stored when the mobile phone is disconnected. For this reason, delete your personal data using the reset function before selling your vehicle, for example (Y page 47).

Calling up the address book Using the function button: X Press the % function button. You see either the telephone basic menu or the address book, depending on which was last active.

X If the telephone basic menu is displayed, press the % function button again.

Using the telephone basic menu: X When the telephone basic menu is dis- played, select Tel by slidingVZ the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Address Book from the menu and pressW to confirm.

Address book with address book entry and nav- igable dataL X To browse in the address book: turn cVd the COMAND controller.

X To close the address book: press the % button.

i An address book entry can contain the following information: Rname Rfirst name Rcompany Rtwo addresses Rgeo-coordinates Rup to five telephone numbers

Using the address book 147

Te le ph on e

Z

Searching for an address book entry

Search menu with character bar : Address book entry ; L Complete address data from the nav-

igation system = Character bar ? dPhone book entry on themobile phone A Entry with voice tag For more symbols, see the symbol overview (Y page 137) X Find entry (Y page 137)

Creating a new entry in the address book You can enter address data directly into the address book. If you store telephone num- bers in the COMAND phone book, these are also saved in the address book. If you store a navigation destination, COMAND creates an address book entry which includes the com- plete navigable address data. X Call up the address book (Y page 147) X Select New in the address book by sliding V and turning cVd the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm. An input menu with data fields appears.

Input menu with data fields : Selected data field with cursor ; Character bar X Enter characters (Y page 33) X Store the entry (Y page 34)

Deleting an address book entry X Option 1: select Delete by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Option 2: search for an address book entry (Y page 137).

X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. Irrespective of the option chosen, a prompt will appear.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, the entry will be deleted. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

148 Using the address book Te le ph on e

Displaying the detailed view for an address book entry

Selecting an entry

Detailed display of address book : To return to the previous menu ; \ Business details = List symbol (to call up options) X Search for an address book entry (Y page 137)

X Make a selection in the selection list by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

or X Call up the address book (Y page 147) X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X PressW the COMAND controller. The detailed view appears.

Starting route guidance to an address X Select the address data field by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The route to the destination address is cal- culated and route guidance starts (Y page 69).

Calling a telephone number X Select the phone number data field by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. This initiates dialing and you can thenmake your call (Y page 133).

Showing the details of an address book entry X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

X Select Details and pressW to confirm. The display is shown in full.

X To close the detailed display: press the % back button.

Changing an address book entry X Option 1: search for an address book entry (Y page 137).

X Make a selection in the selection list by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select Edit and pressW to confirm. X Option 2: call up the detailed view for an address book entry (Y page 149).

X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

X Select Edit and pressW to confirm. Irrespective of the option chosen, the input menu containing data fields appears.

Information about character entry (Y page 33)

Using the address book 149

Te le ph on e

Z

Changing the category of a telephone number data field X Display details for an address book entry (Y page 149).

X Select the telephone number data field. X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

X Select Change Category and pressW to confirm.

X Select a number category, e.g. Home. X Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile. X If desired, select Preferred and pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous status, switch the option on O or off . The phone num- ber is displayed as the first number in the phone book and can be dialed immediately.

X Select Save and pressW to confirm. The new category is stored.

Calling a number stored in an entry

Prerequisites The mobile phone must be connected via the Bluetooth Interface (Y page 126).

Dialing a number X Display details for an address book entry (Y page 149).

X Select the phone number data field by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller.

X PressW the COMAND controller to con- firm.

or X Select the list symbol to the right of the data field by slidingVY the COMAND con- troller.

X PressW the COMAND controller to con- firm.

X Select Call and pressW to confirm. The phone makes the call. The display switches to telephone mode.

Storing the phone number as a speed dial number X Display details for an address book entry (Y page 149).

X Select the phone number data field by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the data field by slidingVY the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Speed Dial and pressW to con- firm. You can now store the number in one of the ten speed dial presets (Y page 142).

Starting route guidance to an entry

Address book entry with navigable data This function is available as soon as you have stored a destination in the destination mem- ory (Y page 104). X Search for an address book entry with the L symbol and select it from the list (Y page 148).

X Display details for an address book entry (Y page 149).

X Select the address data field by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Route guidance begins.

or X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

X Select Navigate and pressW to confirm. Route guidance begins.

Address book entry without navigable data Route guidance can also be started for an address book entry without theL symbol. If the address data or designations do not match the digital map, COMANDprompts you to re-enter the address.

150 Using the address book Te le ph on e

X Enter the destination address (Y page 63) X Start route guidance. The navigable address is automatically added to the address book entry.

i This will provide youwith an address book entry that is suitable for navigation. The next time the navigation is started, the address data in the navigation, rather than the postal address, is used if you have changed address in the address entry menu. Therefore, make sure that the des- tination address is the desired destination when starting navigation from the address book.

Voice tags

Introduction You can enter voice tags via the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instruc- tions). Once you have assigned a voice tag to an address book entry, you can call up this entry with a voice command and dial a phone number, for example. You can add one voice tag per address book entry.

Adding or changing a voice tag X Search for an address book entry with or without a voice tag () (Y page 148).

X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

X Select Voice Name and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Add or Change and pressW to con- firm. Subsequent operation is voice-controlled. The Voice Control System guides you through the dialogs.

Deleting a voice tag X Search for an address book entry with a voice tag (Y page 148).

X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

X Select Voice Name and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A deletion prompt appears.

X Select Yes or No and press the 9 button to confirm. If you select Yes, COMAND deletes the voice tag. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

Listening to a voice tag X Search for an address book entry with a voice tag (Y page 148).

X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

X Select Voice Name and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Listen and pressW to confirm. You hear the voice tag.

Importing phone book entries This function allows you to store phone book entries from the mobile phone in the address book. The following can be used as a source: Rthe mobile phone Rthe memory card Rthe USB device Rthe Bluetooth Interface Imported phone book entries are indicated in the phone book by different symbols (Y page 137).

Using the address book 151

Te le ph on e

Z

X Search for an entry in the phone book on the mobile phone d (Y page 137).

X Select the list symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

X Select Save Entry and pressW to con- firm. The Data saved message appears. The phone book entry is now saved as an address book entry. The d symbol is replaced by the sym- bol.

Importing contacts

Information and requirements You can import contacts (vCards) from the memory card and a USB device into the address book, or receive vCards via Blue- tooth.

i Up to 2500 entries can be imported into the address book. A message notifies you when the maximum number is reached. You then have to delete existing entries in order to import new entries (Y page 148).

Depending on the source of the contact data, different requirements apply:

Source Prerequisites

Memory card The SD memory card is inserted (Y page 196). It contains importable con- tact details.

USB device The USB device is inserted into the USB port (Y page 197). It contains importable contact details.

Requirements for receiving vCards via Bluetooth You can receive vCards from devices (e.g. from a PC) that support the sending of vCards via Bluetooth.

It is not necessary to authorize the device in COMAND to do so. Please bear the following in mind: RBluetooth must be activated in COMAND and on the Bluetooth device; see the oper- ating instructions for the device. Rthe Bluetooth devicemust be able to send vCards via Bluetooth (see operating instructions for the device). Rthe Bluetooth device in the vehicle must be switched on.

Importing from thememory card orUSB device Entries imported from the memory card or from a USB device have the symbol. The following conditions must be fulfilled in order to import vCards: RvCards (vcf files)may be located in themain directory or in folders. COMAND allows you to select the relevant folders directly. RvCards must have the file extension ".vcf".

i One vcf file may contain several vCards. COMAND supports vCards in versions 2.1 and 3.0.

X Select Address Book in the address book or, if the telephone basic menu is shown, select Phone by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Download Contacts and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select From The Memory Card or From USB Device in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Add or Overwrite and pressW to confirm. Add imports the entries from the memory card or USB device into the address book.

152 Using the address book Te le ph on e

Overwrite imports the entries from the memory card or USB device and overwrites all entries in the address book with the symbol. The previous entries are then no longer available. After the contact data has been imported successfully, you will see a message to this effect. The address book or the respective telephone basic menu is displayed. i You can select Overwrite if the address book already contains corresponding entries. A message notifies you when the address book is full.

Receiving vCards via Bluetooth

X Select Address Book in the address book or, if the telephone basic menu is shown, select Phone by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select Download Contacts and pressW to confirm.

X Select Receive Contacts From Phone in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. This interrupts the Bluetooth connection between COMAND and your active mobile phone. COMAND is, however, ready to receive vCards from another Bluetooth device (PC, mobile phone).

X Start the data transfer on the external Blue- tooth device (see the operating instruc- tions for the device).

The number of vCards received is dis- played.

X To end reception: pressW or the% back button. COMAND then reconnects to the mobile phone.

Received vCards are identified by the symbol in the address book.

i If you switch to another main function, e.g. navigation, while receiving vCards, the reception of vCards will be terminated.

Deleting contacts X Select Address Book in the address book or, if the telephone basic menu is shown, select Phone by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select Delete Contacts and pressW to confirm.

X Select one of the following options: RInternal Contacts RContacts From Storage Device RReceived Business Cards RDelete All A prompt corresponding to your selection appears.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. If you select Yes, the contacts are deleted according to your selection. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

Using the address book 153

Te le ph on e

Z

Switching importing of contacts on/off

You can choose whether contacts are auto- matically downloadedwhen amobile phone is connected to COMAND, or whether the auto- matic download is suppressed. Connecting a mobile phone (Y page 126) X Select Tel in the telephone basic menu by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select Import Contacts from and pressW to confirm. You can allow O or suppress the auto- matic download.

Proceed as follows if you do not want to save sensitive contacts in the address book: X Connect the mobile phone to COMAND. Contacts are automatically downloaded to the address book.

X Delete sensitive contacts in the address book.

X Switch off the Import Contacts from function . The next time you connect your mobile phone to COMAND, no more contacts will be downloaded, not even newly-added con- tacts.

Switching the display of contact details (privacy) on/off Using the Hide Data setting, you can decide whether the phone and address book data are to be visible on the screen. You can therefore,

for example, prevent a passenger from seeing the name of a caller. Activating the function has the following effects: RThe mobile phone's phone book and address book data are hidden. They can therefore not be used to make calls, send text messages or to navigate. You still have access to the phone book and address book stored on COMAND. RDuring incoming calls, the caller's name is not displayed if there is an address book entry for the number that is calling. RDuring outgoing calls where the number is entered manually, the recipient's name is not displayed, even if there is an address book entry for the entered number. RThe call list is hidden. RRedialing is not possible. RThe received text messages list is hidden. There is still a notification for incoming text messages. For this to be the case, the con- nected mobile phone must support the MAP profile. However, it is not possible that, for example, the passenger could see the phone number or have access to the message.

Connecting a mobile phone (Y page 126) X Select Tel in the telephone basic menu by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

154 Using the address book Te le ph on e

X To hide details: select Hide Data: and pressW to confirm. You can allow access to address data or you can prevent access O.

Using the address book 155

Te le ph on e

Z

156

Your COMAND equipment ................ 158 General notes .................................... 158 Setting access data (Canada only) .. 159 Establishing/ending the connec- tion ..................................................... 166 Google local search ....................... 167 Destination/route download ........... 170 Options .............................................. 172 Other services ................................... 174 Internet radio .................................... 175 Internet .............................................. 176

157

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described.

General notes

Conditions for access

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating COMAND. USA only: To use COMAND Mercedes-Benz Apps and Internet access, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rmbrace is activated and operational Rmbrace is activated for COMAND Mercedes-Benz Apps and Internet access

Priority of connections: an emergency call has the highest priority. When a service call, e.g. a breakdown service call or the MB Info Call, is active, an emergency call can still be initiated. A service call, on the other hand, has priority over a current Internet connection. Therefore, you cannot establish an Internet connection during a service call.

i The availability of individual COMAND Mercedes-Benz Apps may vary depending on the country.

i The terms of use are shown when COMAND is used for the first time and then once a year thereafter. Only read and accept the terms of use when the vehicle is stationary.

i Internet pages cannot be shown on the driver's side while the vehicle is in motion.

Canada only: The COMAND Mercedes-Benz Apps and the Internet access are available via the Blue- tooth interface. In order to use the functions, the following conditions are necessary: RThe mobile phone supports the DUN Blue- tooth profile (Dial-Up Networking) and is connected to COMAND via the Bluetooth interface (Y page 126). The DUN Blue- tooth profile enables the mobile phone to establish a dial-up connection to the Inter- net. RYou need a valid mobile service contract with a data option, which is used to calcu- late the associated connection costs. RThe access data of the mobile phone net- work provider must be set on COMAND for the connected mobile phone (Y page 160).

i If the connected mobile phone supports the PAN Bluetooth profile (Personal Area Network), you can use the automatic con- figuration function (Y page 160).

i You can obtain more detailed information about suitable mobile phones on the Inter- net at http://www.mercedes- benz.com/connect or from your author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i If you use incorrect access data, addi- tional costs may be incurred. This can hap- pen when you use details that are different from the contract or details from another contract/data package.

158 General notes On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

i The availability of individual Mercedes- Benz Apps may vary depending on the country.

i The terms of use are shown when COMAND is used for the first time and then once a year thereafter. Only read and accept the terms of use when the vehicle is stationary.

i Internet pages cannot be shown on the driver's side while the vehicle is in motion.

Connection difficulties while the vehi- cle is in motion (Canada only) The following could be the cause of call dis- connection: Rinsufficient GSM/UMTS network coverage Rthe vehicle has moved into a GSM cell with no free channels Rthe SIM card used is not compatible with the network available Ryou are using a mobile phone with "Twin- card" and the mobile phone with the sec- ond SIM card is logged into the network at the same time

Function restrictions (Canada only) You will not be able to use the mobile phone, will no longer be able to use themobile phone, or you may have to wait before using it, in the following situations: Rwhen the mobile phone is switched off Rif the Bluetooth function is switched off in COMAND Rif the Bluetooth function is switched off on the mobile phone while you are using Blue- tooth interface telephony Rif the mobile phone has not logged on to a mobile phone network Rif neither themobile phone network nor the mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a phone and an Internet connection

i It is possible that you may not be able to receive calls when an Internet connection is active. This depends on themobile phone and the mobile phone network used.

Roaming (Canada only) When you are driving your vehicle in a differ- ent country and using COMAND and Internet functions, additional costs may be incurred (roaming fees). When you are in a different country, your SIM card must be enabled for data roaming. If your mobile phone network provider does not have a data roaming agree- ment with the roaming partner, it may not be possible to establish an Internet connection. Deactivate this function on your mobile phone if youwant to avoid data roamingwhen you are in a different country.

Setting access data (Canada only)

Introduction To use online and Internet functions, you need Internet access data for the connected mobile phone. You can obtain this from your mobile phone network provider. A selected/manually set mobile phone net- work provider is only valid for the mobile phone connected when the selection/setting is made. The mobile phone network provider is set automatically upon reconnection.

i When you are driving your vehicle in a dif- ferent country and using the online and Internet functions on COMAND, you may incur additional costs (roaming fees).

i While initializing the mobile phone for the Internet connection, access data which is already on the mobile phone may be over- written. You should therefore check the settings on the mobile phone (see the mobile phone operating instructions).

i Adjust the access data settings when the vehicle is stationary. You may otherwise be

Setting access data (Canada only) 159

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others.

Selecting/setting Internet access data

Calling up mobile network providers X Select the icon in the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The carousel view appears.

X Select Settings by sliding V and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. When you connect the mobile phone to COMAND for the first time (Y page 126), there is no mobile phone network provider preset. Provider: is followed by thewords Not Selected. If amobile phone is connected and amobile phone network provider has been selected, the name of the mobile phone network is shown after Provider:.

X PressW the COMAND controller. The list of mobile phone network providers appears.

In order to set the access data of the mobile phone network provider you can: Rselect the predefined access data of the mobile phone network provider (Y page 161) Rconfigure automatically this option only appears in the list of providers if the con- nected mobile phone supports the Blue- tooth PAN (Personal Area Network) pro- file (Y page 160). Rmanually set the access data of the mobile phone network provider (Y page 162)

Configuring access data automatically

Requirement: your telephone must be con- nected to COMAND via Bluetooth and must support the Bluetooth PAN profile. Option 1 if your telephone is not yet config- ured for Internet access: X Select the icon in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cV d the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. You will see a message informing you that automatic configuration is possible.

X Select Yes and pressW to confirm.

Option 2: X In the list of mobile phone network provid- ers, select Autom. Configuration by turning cVd the

160 Setting access data (Canada only) On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm (Y page 160). The configuration data is transferred from the mobile phone. If the configuration is successful, a# dot appears in front of Autom. configuration .

Selecting access data of the mobile phone network provider

Searching for providers X Select Search for Providers in the mobile phone network providers list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm (Y page 160). A list of countries appears.

X Select the country of your mobile phone network provider, e.g. Germany, and press W to confirm. The list of available mobile phone network providers appears. i The access data for themobile phone net- work provider is selected once for the mobile phone connected and is loaded again each time the mobile phone is con- nected (Y page 160).

i You must set the access data of the mobile phone network provider who pro- vides the SIM card and the associated data package (access settings) for the connec- tedmobile phone. The access data remains the same when you are in a different coun- try (roaming). The access data of another network is not selected. There are mobile phone network providers who offer multiple access data. This depends on the data package used, for example.

The mobile phone network only has one access setting X Select the mobile phone network provider by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X To check preset access data: select Edit and confirm withW. The list of access data appears (Y page 162).

X Check the access data. X If the access data is correct: press the % reset button or the& symbol and pressW to confirm. You can now accept the access data of the mobile phone network provider.

X Select Save and pressW to confirm. The list of mobile phone network providers appears; the access data of the provider has been accepted.

Setting access data (Canada only) 161

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

X To edit the access data: proceed as described for manually entering the access data (Y page 162). When you confirm the edited access data, the list of mobile phone network providers appears and displays the selected provider.

If, after selecting amobile phone network provider, several access settings are dis- played: X Select the appropriate access setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X To check access settings: select Edit and pressW to confirm. The list of access data appears (Y page 162).

X Check the access data. X If the access data is correct: press the % reset button or the& symbol and pressW to confirm. You can now accept the access data of the mobile phone network provider.

X Select Save and pressW to confirm. The list of mobile phone network providers appears; the access data of the provider has been accepted.

X To edit the access data: proceed as described in "Manually setting the access data of themobile phone network provider" (Y page 162). When you confirm the edited access data, the list of mobile phone network providers appears and displays the selected provider.

The currently selected access settings (# dot in front of the entry) are used for the connec- ted mobile phone. X To return to the carousel view: press the % back button twice.

or X PressW the COMAND controller and then the% back button.

Manually setting the access data of the mobile phone network provider

List of access data (new provider) Calling up the list of access data X Confirm Create New Provider in the list of mobile phone network providers by pressingW the COMAND controller. The list of access data appears. The stand- ard name Provider is automatically entered into the Provider: field. You can now make the entries.

i The access data of the mobile phone net- work provider is set once for the connected mobile phone.

162 Setting access data (Canada only) On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Explanation of the access data

Input field Meaning

Provider: Name of the provider to be displayed in the list of mobile phone network providers. The name can be freely selected. The standard entry is Provider .

Tel. Number: Access number for estab- lishing the connection

i The access number depends on the mobile phone used. For GSM/ UMTS mobile phones, *99***1# is used as a standard.

Access Point:

APNnetwork access point (Access Point Name) You can obtain this infor- mation from your mobile phone network provider.

i Entry is not necessary for all mobile phone network providers and mobile phones.

User ID: The user identification can be obtained from your mobile phone network provider.

i Entry is not necessary for all mobile phone network providers.

Password: The password can be obtained from your mobile phone network provider.

i Entry is not necessary for all mobile phone network providers.

Input field Meaning

DNS Address: The DNS addresses (Domain Name Service) can be negotiated auto- matically or entered man- ually. The required infor- mation can be obtained from your mobile phone network provider.

i Most mobile phone network providers sup- port the Automatic function. If you selected the Manual option, you are usually required to enter a DNS address.

DNS1: DNS2:

Fields for entering the DNS server addresses manually. The address can be obtained from your mobile phone network provider.

Entering access data X In the list of access data, confirm the Pro vider input field by pressingW (Y page 162). An input menu appears.

X Enter the provider (Y page 33). X To enter the phone number: in the list of access data, select the Tel. Number: input field by sliding V or turning cVd

Setting access data (Canada only) 163

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The input menu for the phone number appears.

X Enter the telephone number. X To enter the access data: in the list of access data, select the Access Point: input field and confirm by pressingW.

X Enter the access data. X To enter the user ID: in the list of access data, select the User ID: input field and confirm by pressingW.

X Enter the user ID. X To enter the password: in the list of access data, select the Password: input field and confirm by pressingW.

X Enter the password.

X To set the DNS address: select Auto matic or Manual with the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm. Automatic: the DNS address is set auto- matically.

Manual: uses the entries in DNS 1 and DNS 2.

Entering the DNS1

Entering the example DNS X After selecting Manual, select the DNS1 input field with the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Enter 172.28.4.81, for example.

Internet access data for other mobile phones If the access data is already available in the list of mobile phone network providers, you can use it for additional mobile phones. The following prerequisites are required for this: Rthe additional mobile phone must be con- nected. Rthe access data must apply to the mobile phone contract of the currently connected mobile phone.

X Select a provider from the list of mobile phone network providers by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm (Y page 161). After you select the provider, the list of mobile phone network providers is closed. The selected provider is entered.

164 Setting access data (Canada only) On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Managing access data of the mobile phone network provider

Overview The access data of the mobile phone network provider can be: Redited Rcopied, then edited and accepted for a new provider name Rdeleted

i Changes that you make to the access data of a mobile phone network provider apply to all mobile phones that use this access data.

i When the Internet connection is active, you cannot edit or delete the access data of the currently set mobile phone network provider.

Editing the access data X Select a provider from the list of mobile phone network providers by turning cVd the COMAND controller (Y page 161).

X Select the symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Confirm Edit by pressingW. The access data is displayed.

X Edit the access data. A description of the entry can be found under "Manually setting the access data of the mobile phone net- work provider" (Y page 162).

Saving access data under a new pro- vider name X Select a provider from the list of mobile phone network providers by turning cVd the COMAND controller (Y page 161).

X Select the symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Confirm Copy Provider Entry by press- ingW. The access data is displayed.

X Edit the access data. A description of the entry can be found under "Making entries" in the "Manually setting the access data of the mobile phone network provider" sec- tion (Y page 162).

Deleting the access data of the mobile phone network provider X Select a provider from the list of mobile phone network providers by turning cVd the COMAND controller (Y page 161).

X Select the symbol to the right of the entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Confirm Delete by pressingW. A prompt appears asking whether you wish to delete the access data.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

Selecting the length of time for auto- matic disconnection from the Internet

Setting access data (Canada only) 165

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

If a preset time has elapsed during which nei- ther the online functions nor the Internet have been used, COMAND automatically discon- nects from the Internet. X Select Settings in the carousel view by sliding V and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Disconnect Automatically After: and pressW to confirm. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select 5 min, 15 min or Off and pressW to confirm. Off switches the function off.

An active Internet connection is identified by the double arrows on the top right of the dis- play.

Establishing/ending the connection

Establishing the connection Preconditions for establishing a connection can be found under "General notes" (Y page 158). X Option 1: select the icon in the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The carousel view appears.

X Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND con- troller until the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel or a favorite is brought to the front, if these have been previously created (Y page 181).

X Option 2: enter a web address (Y page 176).

X For both options, pressW the COMAND controller. The Internet connection is established. An active Internet connection is identified with symbol:. The example shows themenu in the Google Local Search (Y page 167) function.

X To cancel the connection: while the con- nection is being established, confirm Can cel by pressingW.

or X Press the~ button on COMAND or on the multifunction steering wheel.

Ending the connection US only: you cannot cancel the connection yourself. The Internet connection is automatically ter- minated if the system does not recognize any user input within a five-minute time period.

i The~ button is inoperative. Canada only:

166 Establishing/ending the connection On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

X Press the~ button on COMAND or on the multifunction steering wheel.

or X Select the scissors symbol on the bottom right of the carousel view and pressW to confirm.

i If themobile phone Internet connection is canceled, COMAND tries to reconnect. You should therefore always close the connec- tion on COMAND or via the multifunction steering wheel.

Google local search

Calling up the Local Search menu

X Select the icon in the main function bar by turning c V d the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A list with active Mercedes-Benz Apps appears.

X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to the front by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm. The Mercedes-Benz Apps menu is dis- played.

X Confirm the Google Local Search entry by pressingW. The Google Local Search menu appears.

X To exit the menu: select Back by sliding V and turning cVd the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm.

Search

Entry restriction It is only possible to enter a search term in the input menu when the vehicle is stationary.

Entering a search term

Input menu X Confirm Search in the Google Local Search menu by pressingW. The input menu appears.

X To enter using the character bar: enter the search term.

X To enter characters using the number pad: press the number keys in rapid suc- cession. The character appears when the key is pressed. The first available character is highlighted.

Google local search 167

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

X After entering the search term, select by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears. Here, you can select where the destination search should begin.

Selecting the search position

X After a search term has been entered and confirmed, a menu appears. COMAND searches for available POIs for the search term entered: Rnear the current vehicle position Ralong the calculated route If a destination has previously been entered, the function is available. Rnear the destination If a destination has previously been entered, the function is available. Rnear an address

X After selecting Near Destination, enter an address and confirm. The search results are displayed.

Example: search results

Using search results

X Select an entry in the list of search results by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X To show the detailed view: confirm Details by pressingW the COMAND con- troller. The address of the selected entry is dis- played.

X To use a search result as the destina- tion: select Navigate to by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You then switch to navigation mode and can start route calculation (Y page 69). You then switch to navigation mode and can start route calculation. i The search result is stored in the "Last destinations" memory at the same time (Y page 107). You can take the desti- nation from this memory and save it per- manently in the destination memory (Y page 104).

X To call up a destination: select Call with the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You then switch to the telephone function and make the call (Y page 132). You then switch to the telephone function and make the call. i If there is no phone number available, the menu item cannot be selected.

168 Google local search On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

X To import a destination: select Import with the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You can choose whether you want to save the POI as a personal POI on the SD mem- ory card or in the address book. i If there is no SD memory card in the slot, the Save As Personal POI menu item cannot be selected.

X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196). X To save as a personal POI: confirm Save As Personal POI by pressingW the COMAND controller. The entry is saved as a personal POI on the SD memory card. i You can use a personal POI in navigation mode for route calculation (Y page 85). If the personal POI is saved on the SDmem- ory, you can also use it for route calculation in another vehicle.

X To save to the address book: select Save to Address Book by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The entry is stored in the address book.

Popular searches

This function allows you to search using pre- defined search criteria. X Bring Popular Searches in the Local Search menu to the front by turning cVd

(the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu displays the available search crite- ria.

Example: popular searches X Select the search criteria and pressW to confirm.

X Proceed as described in the "Selecting the search position" section (Y page 168). If the vehicle is stationary, the search results can be supplemented manually, e.g. "Hotel Adler".

Search History

This function offers you the previous search queries. X Bring Search History in the Local search menu to the front by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The previous search queries are shown with the most recent at the top.

Google local search 169

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

X Select the search criteria and pressW to confirm.

X Proceed as described in the "Selecting the search position" section (Y page 168). If the vehicle is stationary, the search results can be supplemented manually, e.g. "Hotel Adler".

Destination/route download

Introduction You can send destinations and routes from Google maps to the server and download these via this function. You can use the des- tinations and routes for route guidance and save them for further use. In order to use the download destination/ route function, the mbrace system must be: Ractivated Rset up Rand activated for COMAND and Internet access services.

For information on the mbrace system, see the separate vehicle Operator's Manual.

Sending destinations to the server X Call up the website for Google Maps on the Internet.

X Enter a destination. X Click "More" at the destination. X Click "Send". X Click "Send to vehicle".

X Select Mercedes-Benz as the vehicle brand.

X Enter the mbrace e-mail address or the vehicle identification number.

X Enter the vehicle identification number. X Click "Send". The destination is sent to the server. i The availability of the destination/route download function is country-dependent.

Downloading destinations from the server Proceed as follows to use destinations/ routes that have been sent to the server: X Select the symbol in the main function bar by turning cVd the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm. The carousel view appears.

X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to the front by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The Mercedes-Benz Apps menu is dis- played.

X Bring the Dest./Route Download panel to the front and pressW to confirm. i With Exit, you quit the destination/route download. With Options, you set the options for the destination/route download (Y page 173).

170 Destination/route download On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

X Confirm the Dest./Route Download panel by pressingW. Available routes and destinations are shown in the list.

You can save up to 20 routes and 50 desti- nations for your vehicle on the server and dis- play these in the list. If you send further routes or destinations to the server, the existing entries are deleted from the list.

i The routes/destinations sent from Goo- gle maps to the server are automatically deleted from there after seven days.

Using destinations

Calling up the menu X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

Displaying details X Confirm Details in the menu by pressing W the COMAND controller. The route or destination is displayed.

X To call up a POI: confirm the entry by pressingW. i You can use the function if: Ra mobile phone is connected (Y page 126) Rthe destination address contains a tele- phone number

Using as the destination X Select Navigate to in themenu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You then switch to navigation mode and can start route calculation (Y page 69). i A route can only be stored as a personal POI on an SDmemory card or taken directly for route calculation (Y page 171).

Calling up the destination X Select Call in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You then switch to the telephone function and make the call (Y page 132).

Importing a destination/route When importing, you can choose whether you want to save the destination as a personal POI on anSDmemory card or in the address book. You can only save routes as personal POIs to an SD memory card, but not in the address book. X Select Import in the menu with the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. i If there is no SD memory card in the slot, the As Personal POImenu item is grayed out.

X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196). X To save as a personal POI: confirm As Personal POI by pressingW the COMAND controller. The entry is saved as a personal POI on the SD memory card. i You can use a personal POI in navigation mode for route calculation (Y page 85). You can also use a personal POI in another vehicle for route calculation.

X To save to the address book: select To Address Book by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The entry is stored in the address book.

Destination/route download 171

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

Deleting a destination/route from the server X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A query appears asking whether the desti- nation or the route should be deleted.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

Options

Introduction You can select options for the following Mercedes-Benz Apps on COMAND: RLocal Search (Y page 172) RDestination download (Y page 173) You can reset the selected options to the default settings (Y page 174).

Calling up the options menu X Select the symbol in the main function bar by turning c V d the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm. The carousel view appears.

X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to the front by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Options by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Selecting options for the local search

Setting the search radius

X Select Local Search in the Options menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The menu shows the current settings.

X Confirm the entry after Search Radius: by pressingW. The # dot indicates the currently selected search radius.

X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The selected setting is accepted.

X To exit the menu: select Back by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

172 Options On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Selecting a service provider

X Select Local Search in the Options menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The menu shows the current settings.

X Select the entry after Service Provider: by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The # dot indicates the currently selected service provider.

i If the entry is grayed out, you cannot select the service provider.

X Select an entry and pressW to confirm. The selected service provider is accepted.

X To exit the menu: select Back by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Deleting/saving searches X Select the Delete All Searches entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears, asking whether you really wish to delete the search.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

Setting options for destination/route download

Setting the type of import You can choose between manual and auto- matic importing. X Select the entry after Import: by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select Manual or Automatic and pressW to confirm. The setting is accepted.

X To exit the menu: select Back by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Deleting/saving POIs after they have been imported to the server X Select the entry after Import & Delete: by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm. The setting is accepted. Yes deletes the POIs after importing to the server. No does not delete the POIs on the server.

X To exit the menu: select Back by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

i Routes and destinations are automati- cally deleted on the server after seven days.

Conditions of use You can review the terms of use for the COMAND Mercedes-Benz Apps and Goo- gle. X Select Terms and Conditions in the optionsmenu by sliding ZV the COMAND

Options 173

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

controller and pressW to confirm (Y page 172).

X Select Mercedes-Benz Apps or Google and pressW to confirm. The respective start page appears.

X Select Continue to view further content.

Resetting adjustments With the reset function, all Mercedes-Benz Apps settings are reset to the factory set- tings. X Select the symbol in the main function bar by turning c V d the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm. The carousel view appears.

X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to the front by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Options by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Reset and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to reset.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

Other services

Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website

For individual Mercedes-Benz Apps, it may be necessary to pay license fees before using. Use is then limited to a certain period of time.

License fees must be paid again for use beyond this time period. The COMAND functions include the Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website as a prede- fined favorite. X Select the icon in the main function bar by turning c V d the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The carousel view appears.

X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Mobile Web site panel to the front by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The Mercedes-Benz home page appears. i You cannot delete the Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website panel.

Further Mercedes-Benz Apps You can call up additional Mercedes-Benz Apps, such as Facebook, or Google serv- ices, such as Street View or Panoramio, here. The following examples show how to call up a Mercedes-Benz App, for example Facebook, and generally how to call up Google serv- ices. To call up Facebook: X Select the icon in the main function bar by turning c V d the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The carousel view appears.

X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to the front by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm. The Mercedes-Benz Apps menu is dis- played.

X Select Facebook by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The Facebook home page appears.

X To call up Google services: this is done through Google Local Search (Y page 169).

174 Other services On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

i Facebook is a social network. This App allows you to log in from your vehicle and use Facebook's many functions. Google Street View allows you to view streets in 360-degree panoramas. Google Panoramio expands Google Local Search to include photos at the selected position.

Internet radio

General notes A good Internet connection is required to transmit audio data efficiently. To ensure the best-possible reception, your mobile phone should be connected to the vehicle's exterior antenna via the phone bracket (optional). Bear in mind that a relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using the Inter- net radio. An average 128kbit per second data transfer rate can transfer 56MB of data in one hour. The data transfer rate of a station is displayed while receiving data.

Calling up the Internet radio

X Select the icon in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cV d the

COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The carousel view appears.

X Bring the Internet Radio panel to the front by turning cVd the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm. The Internet radio menu appears.

Searching for stations X Select Search in the Internet radio menu. A list with search criteria appears.

X Select criterion and pressW to confirm.

i For example as a search criterion, you can set an Internet radio station that is located close to your navigation destination.

Connecting to a station X Search for a station (Y page 175). X Select; (play) in the Internet radio menu and pressW to confirm. The call is placed.

If the data stream is interrupted, an automatic attempt is made to re-establish the connec- tion. Manually re-establishing a connection X Select; (play) again in the Internet radio menu and pressW to confirm.

Ending data transfer: X Select (stop) in the Internet radio menu and pressW to confirm.

or X Change to another audio source, for exam- ple Disc.

If you change to a main function that is not an audio source, e.g. navigation, the data con- nection remains on. You can continue listen- ing to the set station.

Internet radio 175

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

Internet

Display restriction Internet pages cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion.

Calling up a website

Calling up the carousel view

X Select the symbol in the main function bar by turning c V d the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm. The carousel view appears.

You can now enter a web address (option 1 (Y page 176)) or select it in the carousel view (option 2 (Y page 177)). To select in the carousel view, you must first create favorites (Y page 181).

Option 1: entering the web address You can enter the web address using either the character bar or the number keypad (Y page 35). X Call up the carousel view (Y page 176). X Select www by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. An input menu appears.

X To enter using the character bar: enter theweb address in the input line. Character entry (Y page 33). As soon as the first letter has been entered in the input line, a list appears below it. The list shows web addresses which begin with the letters you have entered and web addresses which have already been called up. The list is empty the first time you call it up.

X To enter characters using the number pad: press the number keys in rapid suc- cession. The character appears when the key is pressed. The first available letter is high- lighted. Enter the character using the char- acter bar (Y page 35).

176 Internet On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

X After entering the web address, select the symbol by turning cVd or sliding XVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The website is called up.

X To select a web address in the list: slide ZV the COMAND controller in the input menu with character bar. The list is activated.

X Select the web address by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Theweb address is entered in the input line.

X PressW the COMAND controller. The website is called up. The Establish ing data connection to ... message appears.

Option 2: selecting favorites You must create at least one favorite in the carousel view for this function (Y page 181).

X Call up the carousel view (Y page 176). X In the carousel view, bring a favorite to the front by turning cVd or sliding XVY the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The website is called up.

Internet 177

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

Navigating the website

Overview

Step Result

X Turn cVd the controller.

Navigates from one item that can be selected (e.g. link, text field or selec- tion list) to the next and highlights the respective element on the website.

Sliding the control- ler: X Left or right XVY

X Up or down ZV

X Diagonally aVb

Moves the pointer on the page.

X PressW the con- troller.

Calls up themenu or opens the selected item.

X Press the k button.

Calls up the previ- ous page.

X Press the 2 button.

Closes the Internet browser. If several windows are open, the current window is closed.

Example: highlighting an item that can be selected

X Turn cVd the COMAND controller. A button is highlighted in the example.

Example: entering text

X Select an input line by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The character bar appears.

X Enter the text using the character bar or the number keypad. Character entry (Y page 33).

X If the text has been entered, select the symbol by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The text has now been entered.

178 Internet On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Menu functions

Calling up the menu

X To call up the short menu: highlight the selectable item on the page by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X To call up the entire menu: when the short menu is displayed, slideV the COMAND controller downwards.

or X Select a free area on the website by sliding ZV, XVY or aVb the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

Open Opens the website to the selectable item. X Call up the menu (Y page 179). X Confirm Open by pressingW the COMAND controller.

Enter URL X Call up the menu (Y page 179). X Select Enter URL by turning cVd or slid- ing ZV the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

X Enter a web address (URL) (Y page 176).

Calling up the previous website X Call up the menu (Y page 179). X Select Previous by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Calling up the next website X Call up the menu (Y page 179). X Select Next by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

View You can use this function to: Rposition a selection window on websites that are larger than the display Rselect a window that is already open

Internet 179

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

X Call up the menu (Y page 179). X Select View by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

or X Press thez key on the number keypad.

i You cannot use thez key if a phone call is being made.

X To position the selection window: con- firm Fullscreen View of Current Page by pressingW the COMAND controller. A selection window appears on the web- site.

X Slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller and position the selection win- dow on the website.

X PressW the COMAND controller. The selected section is enlarged.

X To display and select open windows: select Display Open Windows by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm. The carousel view appears.

X PressW the COMAND controller. The website is displayed.

Exiting the menu X Call up the menu (Y page 179). X Select Exit by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The Internet browser is closed. If other win- dows are opened in the background, another prompt appears.

Other menu functions Opening in a new window You can open up to five windows simultane- ously.

X Call up the menu (Y page 179). X Select Open In A New Window by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

X To select awindow: select View and press W to confirm.

X Select the website in the carousel view by turning cVd or sliding XVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Add To Favorites Adds the current website to the favorites. The website can then be called up using the car- ousel view. You can save up to 20 favorites in the carousel view. X Call up the menu (Y page 179). X Select Add To Favorites by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The followingmessage appears: The page has been added to your favorites.

Display favorites X Call up the menu (Y page 179). X Select Display Favorites by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm. The favorites are shown in the carousel view.

Further information on favorites (Y page 181). Refreshing a website X Call up the menu (Y page 179). X Select Reload by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Closing the active window X Call up the menu (Y page 179). X Select Close Active Window by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

or X Press the 2 button to the right of the COMAND controller.

180 Internet On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

i You cannot use the 2 button if a phone call is being made.

Displaying the complete web address of the selected link X Call up the menu (Y page 179). X Select Link Details by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The URL appears.

X PressW the COMAND controller and close the display.

Settings The settings are described in a separate sec- tion (Y page 183).

Favorites

Introduction Favorites are frequently visited websites. You have the following options for creating a favorite: Rin the carousel view (Y page 181) Rvia the menu item Add To Favorites (Y page 180)

Before creating a favorite in the carousel view, you must first close active connections (Y page 166). You can select and edit favorites that you have created.

Creating favorites Creating favorites in the carousel view X Call up the carousel view (Y page 176). X Bring the Create New Favorite panel to the front by turning cVd or sliding XVY the COMAND controller.

X PressW the COMAND controller. An input menu appears.

X Enter the web address (URL) and name using either the character bar or the num- ber keypad. Entering characters (Y page 33)

X Select theicon and pressW to con- firm. The favorite has been created.

Adding a favorite via the menu X When a website is displayed, call up the menu.

X Select Add To Favorites in themenu and pressW to confirm (Y page 180).

Selecting favorites X Call up the carousel view (Y page 176). X Select the favorite in the carousel view by turning cVd or sliding XVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The favorite is opened.

Editing favorites Editing favorites in the carousel view X Call up the carousel view (Y page 176). X Select Edit by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. An input menu appears.

X Enter the web address (URL) and name using either the character bar or the num- ber keypad (Y page 33).

Internet 181

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

Editing favorites in the Favorites menu X Call up the menu (Y page 179). X Select Display Favorites by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The favorite is displayed.

X PressW the COMAND controller. The favorites menu appears.

X Select Edit by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

or X Press theg button on the number key- pad (this function is not available if you are using the telephone at the same time). An input menu appears.

X Enter the web address (URL) and name using either the character bar or the num- ber keypad. Character entry (Y page 33).

Other functions in the favorites menu Opening current favorites X Call up the Favorites menu (Y page 181). X Confirm Open by pressingW the COMAND controller.

Opens the current favorites in a new window. Opening in a new window X Call up the Favorites menu (Y page 181). X Select Open In A New Window by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND control- ler and pressW to confirm.

Calling up details X Call up the Favorites menu (Y page 181). X Select Details by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

or X Press thez button on the number key- pad (this function is not available if you are using the telephone at the same time). The detailed view appears.

Exiting X Call up the Favorites menu (Y page 181). X Select Exit by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

or X Press the k back button on the left next to the COMAND controller. The Favorites menu closes.

Deleting favorites Deleting favorites in the carousel view X Call up the carousel view (Y page 176). X Select Delete by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears.

X Select Yes and pressW to confirm. The favorite is deleted. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

Deleting favorites in the Favorites menu X Select Delete by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

or X Press the 2 button to the right of the COMAND controller. The favorite is deleted.

182 Internet On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Settings

Settings menu

X Call up the menu (Y page 179). X Select Settings by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

You can activate/deactivate the following settings: RDownload Images Automatically It may take some time to download the contents of websites that contain a large amount of images. Therefore, it may be useful to deactivate this option. RBlock Pop-Ups Pop-ups are windows (usually with adver- tisements) which are displayed automati- cally when you call up a website. You can block these displays. RActivate Javascript Javascript makes it possible to display and interact with dynamic content on the web- site. RAllow Cookies Some websites save information in small text files (cookies) in COMAND. You can determine whether cookies may be stored. RCharacter Size You can select the font size which is used when displaying the website. RCharacter Code

You can select a different character set here, e.g. if the characters of a website appear distorted. RDelete Private Data Deletes data which has been saved by the browser during Internet use.

Changing settings X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. Switch the setting on O or off .

X Select Character Size or Character Code by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select a setting using the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm.

i If you change the settings, the websites may not be displayed correctly.

Deleting private data X Select Delete Private Data and press W to confirm. A menu appears.

Internet 183

On lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Z

X Select the setting by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The # dot in front of an entry indicates which setting is active.

or X Select Delete All Data On Exit and pressW to confirm. Switch the setting on O or off .

Option Function

All Deletes all personal data.

Cache Deletes data in the cache.

Cookies Deletes cookies that are created by web- sites which you have called up.

URL History Deletes all websites visited (path).

ODelete All Data On Exit

If this function is activated O, all pri- vate data is deleted when you exit the Internet browser.

i If you reset COMAND to the factory set- tings (reset function), these settings are deleted (Y page 47).

Calling up the carousel view and clos- ing the Internet browser X To call up the carousel view: press the

k back button for longer than two sec- onds.

X To close the Internet browser: press the k back button again for longer than two seconds.

184 Internet On

lin e an d In te rn et fu nc tio

ns

Your COMAND equipment ................ 186 Radio mode ........................................ 186 Satellite radio .................................... 190 Audio CD and MP3 mode .................. 195 Music search ..................................... 204 MUSIC REGISTER .............................. 207 Bluetooth audio mode .................... 211 Operation with the Media Inter- face .................................................... 217 Audio AUX mode ............................... 223

185

Au di o

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described.

Radio mode

Important notes Portable electronic devices in the vehiclemay seriously impair radio reception.

Switching to radio mode

Switching modes using the function button X Press the $ function button. The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last waveband.

i Repeatedly pressing this function button switches through the wavebands in this order: FM, AM, WB. You then call up satel- lite radio mode. Pressing the button again takes you back to FM radio mode.

Switching modes via the audio menu

Example: audio menu : Current audio operating mode ; Main function bar = Audio menu X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If radiomode was the last mode selected, it will now be active. If another audio mode is switched on, you can now switch to radio mode in the audio menu.

X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The audio menu appears.

Example: HD Radio display : Display window with station settings ; Preset position of the selected station = Name of the selected station (symbol for

HD Radio and number of subprogram) ? Frequency of the selected station A Sound settings

186 Radio mode Au

di o

B FM radio, AM radio or WB radio C Program information D Preset functions E Radio functions X Select FM/AM Radio by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

Switching HD Radio on/off

You can switch off HD Radio in the radio submenu: X Select Radio in the radio display by sliding V the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select HD Radio and pressW to confirm. HD Radio on: O

HD Radio off:

i Notes on HD Radio: HD Radio is a digital radio system from the U.S.A. When HD Radio is off, you will hear only analog programs on all frequen- cies. HD Radio provides: Rdigital transmission on the same wave- bands as analog AM/FM. The analog AM/FM stations remain in the same position when selecting a station. Rbroadcasting of several programstreams over a single FM frequency (e.g. HD1, HD2, etc.). Rclear, interference free reception.

RFM: CD quality sound. AM: analog FM station sound quality. Rthe display of text-based information (e.g. artist, track name) in the display

For further information on HD Radio, visit http://www.hdradio.com.

Switching wavebands You can switch the radio between the FM, AM and WB wavebands.

: Waveband submenu X Option 1: press the $ function button until the desired waveband is set. i Repeatedly pressing this function button switches through the wavebands in this order: FM, AM, WB. You then call up satel- lite radio mode. Pressing the button again takes you back to FM radio mode.

X Option 2: select FM, AM or WB in the radio display by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X The waveband submenu is opened. X Select awaveband and pressW to confirm. You will hear the last station played on the selected waveband. The# dot shows the currently selected waveband.

Radio mode 187

Au di o

Selecting a station

Selects stations via the station search function X Press theE orF button. or X Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND con- troller while the display/selection window in the radio display is active. Station search scans up or down and stops at the next station found.

Selecting station via the station presets X Quick setting: press a number key, e.g. l.

X Directly in the station presets: select Presets by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

or X When the display/selection window is active, pressW the COMAND controller. The station preset memory appears. The # dot indicates under which preset the currently selected station is stored.

X Select a station by turning cVd and press- ingW to confirm or press a number key, e.g.l.

Selecting stations by entering the fre- quency manually X Option 1: press the l button.

X Option 2: select Radio in the radio display by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Enter Frequency and pressW to confirm. Irrespective of the option chosen, an input menu will appear.

X Enter a frequency using the number keys. COMAND sets the frequency entered.

Waveband Frequency

AM (MF) 530 - 1700 kHz

FM (VHF) 87.7 - 107.9 MHz

WB (Weather Band) Weather report channels

i You can only enter currently permitted numbers.

i If you enter a frequency in the FM or AM wavebands which is outside the frequency range, COMAND sets the next lower fre- quency.

Storing station

Storing station manually There are ten presets available for the FM and AM wavebands.

Example: station presets X Quick save: press and hold a number key, e.g.l, until you hear a tone. The station is stored.

188 Radio mode Au

di o

X Directly in the station presets: pressW the COMAND controller when the display/ selection window is active.

or X Select Presets by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. In both cases, the station presets appear. The# dot indicates under which preset the currently selected station is stored.

X Select a preset by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press and holdW until you hear a tone. The station is stored under the preset.

Storing station automatically This function automatically stores stations with adequate reception under the presets. The search starts at the lowest frequency. COMAND stores any stations found, begin- ning with preset 1. When the highest fre- quency is reached or 10 stations have been found, the storing process ends. Any stations storedmanually under the presetswill be lost. COMAND may not occupy all memory slots when storing. X Option 1: pressW the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active. The channel preset memory appears.

X Option 2: select Presets by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The channel preset memory appears.

X Irrespective of the option, select Autos tore and pressW to confirm. In both cases, COMAND searches for sta- tions that can be received. You will see a message to this effect. The available sta- tions are automatically stored in the preset positions.

X To cancel storing: select Cancel and pressW to confirm.

Weather Band

Activating X Press the $ function button repeatedly until the Weather Band is switched on.

or X Select the currently set waveband FM or AM by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select WB from the menu and pressW to confirm.

Searching for a channel X Quick select: turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller while the display/ selection window is active.

or X Press theE orF button. Channel search scans up or down and stops at the next channel found.

Selecting a channel from the channel list

X Select Channel by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The channel list appears.

Radio mode 189

Au di o

X Select a channel by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

or X Press a number key on the control panel, e.g.n, at any time.

Displaying station information

This function is only available for analog FM programs and digital AM/FM programs (HD Radio). Information relevant to the current station is shown below the main function bar. X Select Show Station Information by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous status, you switch Show Station Information on O or off .

Displaying program information

This function is only available for analog FM programs and digital AM/FM programs (HD Radio). Information relevant to the current station is shown in the display window. X Select Info in the radio display by sliding V and turning cVd the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm. Information on the currently selected sta- tion is displayed. Content is dependent on the station.

X To return to the radio display: confirm Info by pressingW.

X Slide ZV the COMAND controller up.

Satellite radio

Important notes i The SatRadio mode described below requires optional satellite radio equipment and registration with a satellite radio pro- vider.

i Note that the categories and channels shown in the illustrations depend on the program content offered by the provider. The program content may vary. The illus- trations and descriptions in these operat- ing instructions may therefore differ from the channels and categories offered by the provider. SatRadiomodemay be temporarily unavail- able or interrupted for a variety of reasons. These reasons include environmental or topographical conditions as well as other issues beyond the control of Mercedes- Benz USA, LLC. This means operation may not be possible in certain areas. These include: Rtunnels Rparking garages Rlocations inside or next to buildings Rlocations in the vicinity of other struc- tures

190 Satellite radio Au

di o

i SIRIUS XM Radio offers more than 130 radio stations in digital quality, for example 100% commercial-free music, sports, news and entertainment. SIRIUS XM Radio employs a fleet of high- performance satellites to broadcast around the clock in the contiguous USA and Can- ada. The satellite radio program is available for a monthly fee. Details are available from the SIRIUS XM Service Center and at http://www.sirius.com (USA) or http://www.siriuscanada.com (Can- ada).

Registering SatRadio

Service information screen : Provider's phone number (SIRIUS XM) ; SIRIUS XM ID of your satellite receiver X Switch on SatRadio mode (Y page 191). The satellite radio main menu appears, showing the weather channel. You cannot select any other stations.

X Select Sat in the lower menu bar and press W to confirm.

X Select Service and pressW to confirm. The service information screen appears.

Once the connection has been established: X Follow the instructions of the service staff. The activation process may take up to ten minutes. If the activation is completed successfully, the No Service message

appears in the display, followed by the sat- ellite radio main menu.

i You can also have the satellite service activated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS XM Radio website at http://www.sirius.com (USA) or http://www.siriuscanada.com (Can- ada).

i If registration is not included when pur- chasing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account. If the satellite receiver is not installed or is not installed correctly, the Device Unavailable message will appear.

Switching on satellite radio mode

Notes For example, to select a channel or scroll in the lists, you can also use the=; 9: buttons on the multifunction steering wheel, see the separate vehicle Operator's Manual. Important information on registering the sat- ellite radio (Y page 191).

Option 1 X Press the $ function button. The No Service message appears when starting up or if no signal is being received. Once COMAND receives the signal, the sat- ellite radio display appears. The station last selected is played.

i Repeatedly pressing this function button switches through the wavebands in this order: FM, AM, WB and subsequently switches on the satellite radio. Pressing the button again takes you back to FM radio mode.

Satellite radio 191

Au di o

Option 2

Satellite radio main menu : Satellite radio main display ; Channel name = Preset ? Selected category/channel number A Channel information (in brief) B Sound settings C Category list D Channel information (in detail) E Channel preset list F Satellite radio menu Channel informationA can be viewed in detail (Y page 195). X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If satellite radio mode was the last mode selected, it will now be active. If another audio mode is switched on, you can now switch to satellite radio mode in the audio menu.

X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The audio menu appears.

X Select Sat and pressW to confirm.

The No Service message appears when starting up or if no signal is being received. If the satellite receiver is not installed or is not installed correctly, the Device Unavailable message will appear.

Changing the category Satellite radio channels are sorted into vari- ous categories. You can choose between var- ious categories such as News/Discussions, Sports and Country (if available). The cate- gory list is sorted alphabetically. X To call up the category list: select Cat. by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The category list appears.

X To select a category: select a category by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The category selected is shown in the dis- play. You hear the station last selected for this category. The All Channels category is at the top of the category list. This category is sorted by channel number and allows you to browse all available channels.

192 Satellite radio Au

di o

Selecting a channel Channel search X Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND con- troller while the display/selection window in the SatRadio display is active.

or X Press theE orF button. COMAND searches in both directions (ascending and descending) and stops at the next channel found in the selected cat- egory.

Satellite radio menu X Select Sat in the submenu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The satellite radio menu appears.

Entering channel numbers directly X Option 1: press the l button. An input menu appears.

X Option 2: select Sat in the submenu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Enter Channel and pressW to confirm. An input menu appears.

Entering the channel X With both options, press the corresponding number buttons on the control unit in suc- cession. COMAND sets the selected channel. i You can only select currently permitted digits.

Selecting a channel from the SatRadio channel list You can select the channel from the channel list (option 1) or via the channel list that shows the artists and tracks that are currently being played (option 2). X Select Sat in the submenu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Option 1 X Select Channel List and pressW to con- firm. The channel list appears.

X Select a channel by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

Satellite radio 193

Au di o

Option 2 X Select Channel List with Artist, Title and pressW to confirm. The channel list appears and displays the artists and tracks currently being played.

X Select a channel by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

Memory functions

Station presets

There are ten presets available. Storing channels X PressW the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active.

or X Select Presets in the submenu bar by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. In both cases, the channel presets appear. The# dot in front of a preset entry indi- cates that the currently selected channel is stored under this preset.

X Select a preset by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press and holdW until you hear a tone.

or X Press and hold a number button, e.g.n, until you hear a tone. The channel is stored under the preset.

Storing channels automatically This function automatically stores channels with adequate reception in the preset mem- ory. Channels stored manually in the preset memory will be overwritten. X Option 1: pressW the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active.

X Select Autostore in the presets by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Option 2: select Presets in the submenu bar by slidingV and cVd turning the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Autostore and pressW to confirm. In both cases, COMAND searches for chan- nels that can be received. You will see a message to this effect. The available chan- nels are automatically stored in the preset positions.

X To cancel storing: select Cancel and pressW to confirm.

Selecting a channel from the preset list X To call up the channel preset list: select Presets in the submenu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The channel preset list appears.

X To set a channel: select a preset by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

or X Press a number key, such asn.

194 Satellite radio Au

di o

Displaying information

X Select Info in the submenu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Information on the currently received pro- gram is displayed.

If available, you will see: Rthe full channel name Rthe artist of the track that is currently being played Rthe track that is currently being played X To return to the radio display: confirm Info by pressingW.

X Slide ZV the COMAND controller up.

Displaying service information

: Provider's phone number (SIRIUS XM) or Call Service Provider

; SIRIUS ID of your satellite receiver The provider's customer service center is available by phone at any time to answer any general questions or questions on the ver- sions available.

X Select Sat in the submenu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Service and pressW to confirm. The provider's details appear.

X To return to the SatRadio main display: slide XVY the COMAND controller.

Channel list updates During reception of a new channel list, the Updating Channels... message is shown. The station last selected is switched to mute until the update has been completed. SatRa- dio mode is not available during this process. Once the update has been completed, the SatRadio basic menu appears. The station last selected is played.

Sound settings Information on sound settings (Y page 30).

Audio CD and MP3 mode

Important safety notes

G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiation. This laser radiation could damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. Never open the housing. Always have main- tenance and repair work carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop.

G WARNING Handling discs while driving may distract you from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Handle discs only when the vehicle is station- ary.

Audio CD and MP3 mode 195

Au di o

Z

Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

G WARNING SDmemory cards are small parts. They can be swallowed and cause asphyxiation. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Keep SD memory cards out of the reach of children. If an SD memory card is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention.

Inserting/ejecting CDs/DVDs

Notes If the CD/DVD has a printed side, this must face upwards when the CD/DVD is inserted. If neither side is printed, the side to be played should face downwards. CDs/DVDs with copy protection may not be able to be played by the system.

i If a medium contains other files in addi- tion to music files, the loading time before the first track starts to play may be longer.

Inserting X Press the8 button. If there is a disc already inserted, it will be ejected.

X Take the disc out of the slot. X Insert a disc into the slot. When a suitable data carrier is correctly inserted, the drive draws it in and plays it.

Removing X Press the8 button. X Take the disc out of the slot. If you do not take the disc out of the slot, it is drawn in again automatically after a short while and reloaded.

Inserting and ejecting an SD memory card

General information COMAND supports SD memory cards (Secure Digital), SDHC memory cards (Secure Digital High Capacity) and SDXC memory cards (Secure Digital eXtended Capacity.

i Not all memory cards available on the market are designed for the temperatures which may be reached in the vehicle. If the SD memory card is no longer in use, you should remove it from COMAND. High temperatures can damage the card. Due to the wide range of SD memory cards available on the market, playback cannot be guaranteed for all brands of SD memory card. The readable storage capacity depends on the memory card used. You can obtain fur- ther information at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Inserting an SD memory card X Insert the memory card into the slot on the control panel until it engages in place. The side with the contacts must face down- wards and point towards the slot. If no MP3 tracks can be found, you will see a message to this effect. The first 100 MP3 tracks are loaded. The first MP3 track is then played. Further tracks are loaded in the background; this is indicated by an hourglass symbol.

Ejecting an SD memory card X Press the memory card. The memory card is ejected.

X Remove the memory card from slot.

196 Audio CD and MP3 mode Au

di o

Connecting a USB device The USB port is located in the stowage com- partment in the center console. Electrical consumption at this connection must not exceed a continuous current of 500 mA. If the electrical consumption is higher, use a separate source to provide power for the USB device (e.g. 12 V power supply). X Connect the USB device (e.g. USB stick) to the USB port. If no MP3 tracks can be found, you will see a message to this effect. The first 100 MP3 tracks are loaded. The first MP3 track is then played. Further tracks are loaded in the background; this is indicated by an hourglass symbol.

i Due to the wide range of USB devices available on the market, playback cannot be guaranteed for all brands of USB device. Information about suitable USB devices can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. MP3 players must support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP). The MTP mode must be active.

Switching to audio CD or MP3 mode

Inserting or connecting a medium X Insert CDs (Y page 196) or X Insert an SD memory card (Y page 196) or X Connect a USB device (Y page 197). COMAND loads the medium inserted and starts to play it.

Switching on using the button X Press the h button one or more times.

By pressing the h button repeatedly, you can switch modes in the following order: R

RCD/video DVD/MP3 CD/MP3 DVD in the single DVD drive (disc mode) RMemory card mode RMUSIC REGISTER RUSB storage device RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode RBluetooth audio mode X Select an audiomedium from themedia list (Y page 198).

Switching modes via the audio menu X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The last active audio source is now activa- ted. You can activate a different audio source using the audio menu.

X Select Audio by sliding Z V and turning cVd theCOMANDcontroller and pressW to confirm. The audio menu appears.

X Select Disc, Memory Card, Music Regis ter, USB Storage or Media Interface and pressW to confirm. This switches to the desired audio source.

X Select an audiomedium from themedia list (Y page 198).

Audio CD and MP3 mode 197

Au di o

Z

Example display: audio CD mode

: CD cover (if available) ; Gracenote media data found, then the

elapsed track time = Track number and track name (if stored

on the disc as CD text or if Gracenote data is available)

? Graphic time and track display A Disc type, disc position in the media list

and disc name (if stored on the disc as CD text or if Gracenote data is available)

B Artist (if stored on the disc as CD text or if Gracenote data is available)

C CD mode menu

Example display: MP3 mode

: Cover (if available) ; Track time = Track number and name ? Graphic time and track display A Medium type, position of medium in the

media list, current folder or current album

B Artist (if available) C MP3 mode menu

Pause function

CD and MP3 mode X To pause playback: briefly press the8 button. The, symbol appears at the top left in the status bar.

X To continue playback: briefly press the 8 button again. The, symbol disappears.

Selecting a CD or MP3 disc

Selecting via the media list X In CD and MP3 mode: select Media using the COMAND controllerV (slide) and cVd (turn) and confirm withW. The media list appears. The# dot indicates the current medium being played.

Media list

Themedia list shows the discs currently avail- able. X Select the data medium by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

198 Audio CD and MP3 mode Au

di o

Positions in the media list

Single DVD drive, position 1: readable data media are audio CDs, MP3 CDs or MP3 DVDs and video DVDs

Memory card, position 2

MUSIC REGISTER, position 3

USB storage device, position 4

Media Interface, position 5

Bluetooth audio: position 6

i If a disc cannot be read, an entry appears next to the corresponding magazine tray.

i If you select a video DVD, the system switches to video DVD mode (Y page 226).

Selecting a track using the number key- pad X When the display/selection window is active, press a number key, e.g.n. The medium at the corresponding position in the media list is loaded and then played.

Selecting a track

Selecting by skipping to a track X To skip forwards or back to a track: turn cVd the COMAND controller when the dis- play/selection window is active.

or X Press theE orF button. The skip forward function skips to the next track. The skip back function skips to the begin- ning of the current track if the track has been playing formore than8 seconds. If the track has been playing for less than 8 seconds, it skips to the start of the pre- vious track.

If the Random Tracks or Random Folder playback option has been selected, the track order is random.

Selecting a track using the number key- pad X Press the key on the number keypad. A numerical entry field appears. The num- ber of positions offered corresponds to the number of tracks on the CD. Only numbers that correspond to a track number on the CD can be entered.

X Enter the desired track number using the number keys. The track plays after the last possible num- ber is entered. i Pressing and holding a number key for more than 2 seconds completes the entry, and the corresponding track is played.

Selecting a track using music search

X Select Current Tracklist, Folder or a category and pressW to confirm.

Select music via categories (e.g. album, artist) with the music search function. If you select a category, COMAND starts a search for track information if the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe data carriers are inserted or connected Rthe track information from these data car- riers is not yet contained in the COMAND music database.

Audio CD and MP3 mode 199

Au di o

Z

COMAND imports track information from the following data carriers: RDisc (CD/MP3) RMemory card RMUSIC REGISTER RUSB storage device The Track information is complete message appears once the search is comple- ted. COMAND stores the music data in its own database. You can now select the avail- able music data within the desired category. You will find further information on searching for music in the "Music search" section (Y page 204). X In audio CD orMP3mode, select Search by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and then pressW to confirm. The category list appears.

Example: current track list X Select the track by turning c V d the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The basic display appears and the track is played.

Fast forwarding/rewinding X While the display/selection window is active, slide X V Y and hold the COMAND

controller until the desired position has been reached.

or X Press and hold theE orF button until the desired position is reached.

Gracenote Media Database

Introduction This function is only available in audio CD mode.

There is a version of Gracenote music recognition technology on the COMAND hard drive. You will recog- nize this by the logo which can be seen in the bottom right-hand corner of certain audio dis- plays. Many audio CDs contain CD text. COMAND uses the information contained therein to dis- play the artist, album and track name. If the audio CD does not contain any CD text information, COMAND can use the Grace- note Media Database to identify unknown audio tracks when in audio CD mode. This is only possible if the relevant information is saved in the GracenoteMedia Database and if the "GracenoteMedia Database" function is activated. If this is the case, COMAND will display the corresponding data such as artist, album and track name in the relevant displays and lists.

200 Audio CD and MP3 mode Au

di o

Selecting Gracenote data to be dis- played

X Switch on CD mode (Y page 197). X Select CD by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Gracenote Media Database by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the current selection for the display.

If several entries exist for the CD of a partic- ular artist, you can select which of the entries should be shown. If the inserted CD does not contain any Gracenote data, the Gracenote Media Database menu item is shown in gray and cannot be selected. X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

Switching the Gracenote data display on/off X Switch on CD mode (Y page 197). X Select CD by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Gracenote Media Database by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X To switch off the display: select None and pressW to confirm. In the basic display, Track 1, Track 2 etc. are shown instead of the Gracenote data, for example (Y page 198).

X To switch on the display: select an entry in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Updating Gracenote music recogni- tion technology and the Gracenote Media Database Due to the release of newCDs, the digital data on the Gracenote Media Database must be updated. Optimum functionality can only be attained with up-to-date Gracenote music recognition technology. Information about new versions can be obtained from an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center. You can have your music recognition soft- ware updated there with a DVD, or you can update it yourself.

i The Gracenote Media Database is upda- ted in conjunction with the navigation sys- tem's digital map (Y page 118).

Displaying the track and album X Press thez button. The current track and album are displayed in a window.

Displaying metadata (MP3 mode) COMAND can also display the album name and artist (metadata) during playback if this information has been entered into the sys- tem.

Audio CD and MP3 mode 201

Au di o

Z

For all media that containMP3 data (e.g. MP3 CD, SD memory card, MUSIC REGISTER), you can determine whether: Rthe metadata contained in the tags of the encoded music data should be displayed Rthe file and directory names should be dis- played during playback

X To display the album and artist name: select MP3 or USB in the basic display by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Display Track Information and pressW to confirm.

Selecting an active partition (USB mass storage devices only) You can select this function for USB mass storage devices when the storage device is partitioned. Up to 5 partitions (primary or log- ical, FAT, FAT32 and NTFS) are supported. X Select MP3 in the basic display by sliding V and turning cVd the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Select Active Partition and pressW to confirm.

Playback options X To select options: switch on audio CD or MP3 mode (Y page 197).

X Select CD or MP3 mode by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and then pressingW to confirm. The options list appears. The # dot indi- cates the option selected.

X Select an option by turning cVd and press W to confirm. The option is switched on. For all options except Normal Track Sequence, you will see a corresponding display in the display/ selection window.

The following options are available to you: RNormal Track Sequence

The tracks are played in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.). InMP3mode, the track order is determined by the order in which the tracks are written to the MP3 data carrier when it is created. Alphabetical order is the most common. Once all the tracks in a folder have been played, the tracks in the next folder are played. RRandom Medium All the tracks on the medium are played in random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.). RRandom Track List (MP3 mode only) You will hear the tracks in the current play- list or currently active folder (including all subfolders) in random order.

i The Normal Track Sequence option is automatically selected when you change the disc you are currently listening to or when you select a different medium. If an option is selected, it remains selected after COMAND is switched on or off.

Notes on MP3 mode

General notes Depending on the volume and format of the MP3 data, the length of time required for reading the data may increase.

Permissible data carriers RCD-R and CD-RW RDVD-R and DVD-RW RDVD+R and DVD+RW RSD memory card RUSB storage device

Permissible file systems RISO 9660/Joliet standard for CDs RUDF for video DVDs RFAT16, FAT32 and NTFS for SD memory card and USB storage media

202 Audio CD and MP3 mode Au

di o

Multisession CDs For multisession CDs, the content of the first session determines how COMAND will proc- ess the CD. COMAND plays only one session and gives priority to the audio CD session. If possible, use COMAND to play only CDs that have been written in one session.

File structure of a data carrier When you create a disc with compressed music files, the tracks can be organized in folders. A folder may also contain subfolders. The disc may contain no more than eight directory levels. Files beyond the eighth level will not be recognized by the system.

i COMAND loads up to 15,000 tracks from an SD memory card or USB storage medium.

Track and file names When you create a disc with compressed music files, you can assign names to the tracks and folders. COMAND uses these names accordingly for the display. Folders that contain data other thanMP3 or WMA tracks are not displayed by COMAND. If MP3 or WMA files are stored in the root directory itself, the root directory will also be treated as a folder. COMAND will then show the name of the root directory as the folder name. You should observe the following when assigning track names: Rtrack names must have at least one char- acter. Rtrack names must have the extension "mp3" or "wma". Rthere must be a dot between the track name and the extension. Example of a correct track name: "Track1.mp3".

Permissible formats COMAND supports the following formats: RMPEG1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3) RMicrosoft WindowsMedia Audio V8 and V9 (WMA) without copy protection Microsoft WindowsMedia Audio V2, V7, V8 and V9 (WMA) Radditional music files in AAC format with the file extensions .aac, .mp4, .m4a and .m4b, but not copy-protected iTunes music files with the extension .m4p.

i If, in addition to MP3 files, there are other music files in these audio formats stored on the disc, the loading process may require a longer time before the first track is played.

i The MP3 audio encoding method is under license from Fraunhofer IIS (Institut Integ- rierte Schaltungen Institute for Integrated Circuits) and Thomson.

Permissible bit and sampling rates COMAND supportsMP3 files of the following types: Rfixed and variable bit rates from 32 kbit/s to 320 kbit/s Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz COMAND supportsWMA files of the follow- ing types: Rfixed bit rates from 5 kbit/s to 384 kbit/s Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz COMAND does not supportWMA files of the following types: RDRM (Digital Rights Management) encryp- ted files Rvariable bit rate RWMA Pro R5.1 surround sound

i Only use tracks with a bit rate of at least 128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least 44.1 kHz. Lower rates can cause a notice- able deterioration in quality. This is espe-

Audio CD and MP3 mode 203

Au di o

Z

cially the case if you have activated a sur- round sound function.

Notes on copyright MP3 or WMA tracks that you create or play back are generally subject to copyright pro- tection in accordance with the applicable international and national regulations. In many countries, reproductions, even for private use, are not permitted without the prior consent of the copyright holder. Make sure that you knowabout the applicable copyright regulations and that you comply with these. If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for your own compositions and recordings, or if the copyright holder has granted you permission, these restrictions do not apply.

Notes on CDs/DVDs

! COMAND is designed to play discs that complywith the EN60908 standard. There- fore, you can only use discs with a maxi- mum thickness of 1.3 mm. If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that contain data on both sides (DVD on one side and audio data on the other), they can- not be ejected and can damage the device. Only use round discs with a diameter of 12 cm. Do not use discs with a diameter of 8 cm, even with an adapter.

Discs with copy protection are not compati- ble with the audio CD standard and therefore may not be able to be played by COMAND. Playback problems may occur when playing copied discs. There is a wide range of data carriers, disc-writing software and writers available. This variety means that there is no guarantee that the system will be able to play discs that you have copied yourself. There may be playback problems if you play CDs that you have copied yourself with a stor- age capacity of more than 700 MB. CDs of this type do not conform to the currently applicable standards.

i COMAND is able to play back audioCDs in multichannel audio format.

Music search

Calling up a category list

Category list X Switch on an audio source and call up the basic display, e.g. MP3mode (Y page 197).

X Select Search by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The category list appears.

The categories are displayed according to the data available. The categories Current Tracklist, Folder, Playlists (if available) and Photos (if available) are already assigned. The other available categories are filled by the music search.

Selecting a category

Starting a music search Select music via categories (e.g. album, artist) with the music search function. If you select a category, COMAND starts a music search under the following conditions: Rthe data carriers are inserted or connected. Rthe music tracks on these data carriers are not yet in the COMAND music database.

204 Music search Au

di o

COMAND reads music tracks from the fol- lowing data carriers: RDisc (CD/MP3) RMemory card RMUSIC REGISTER RUSB storage device

X Select a category in the category list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The Reading Data... message appears. The searchmay take some time, depending on the number of tracks available.

The Track information is complete message appears once the search is comple- ted. Playback then starts with the previously active audio source. X To cancel the music search: confirm Cancel by pressingW.

Selecting artists X Select Artists in the category list by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The available artists are displayed alpha- betically.

Selecting an album

X Select Albums in the category list by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The available albums are displayed alpha- betically. If there is a cover available for an album, it is displayed in front of the album name.

Selecting a track

X Select Tracks in the category list (Y page 204) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The available tracks are displayed.

Music search 205

Au di o

Z

Selecting a year of publication

X Select Year in the category list (Y page 204) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select an entry and pressW to confirm. The genre list is displayed.

X Select a genre, e.g. pop, and pressW to confirm. The track list is displayed.

X Select a track and pressW to confirm. Playback starts.

Selecting composers X Select Composers in the category list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The available composers are displayed alphabetically.

Selecting music genres X Select Genres in the category list by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The available music genres are displayed alphabetically.

Selecting a cover X Select Select By Cover in the category list (Y page 204) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The available covers are displayed in alpha- betical order of the artists.

X Select the desired cover by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The corresponding album is played.

Selecting via keyword search X Select Keyword Search in the category list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. An input menu appears.

X To change the character set used in the character bar: highlight Select by sliding V and turning cVd the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm. A list of available character sets is shown.

X Select the desired character set and press W to confirm.

X Enter characters and confirm the entry. Character entry (Y page 33). Depending on the entry, the hits are shown in a list.

206 Music search Au

di o

X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select an entry, e.g. Artists, and pressW to confirm. The album and cover (if available) are dis- played.

X Confirm the album withW. The tracks on the album are displayed.

X Select a track and pressW to confirm. Playback starts and the basic display appears.

MUSIC REGISTER

General notes ! Retain the original music files in a secure location. An error in COMAND might result in the loss of the music files stored in the MUSIC REGISTER. Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of data.

You can store music files in a compressed format in the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 208). The memory has a capacity of 10 GB.

Switching to the MUSIC REGISTER

MUSIC REGISTER basic display

Example: MUSIC REGISTER : Cover (if available) ; Track time = Track number and name

MUSIC REGISTER 207

Au di o

Z

? Graphic time and track display A Position of the medium in the media list

and name of the medium, followed by the current playback option (no display for Normal Track Sequence)

B Artist C MUSIC REGISTER menu bar

Switching on using the DISC button X Press the h button repeatedly until the MUSIC REGISTER is switched on.

By pressing the h button repeatedly, you can switch modes in the following order: RCD/MP3 (disc) RMemory card mode RMUSIC REGISTER RUSB storage device RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode RBluetooth audio mode If music files are available, playback begins at the point last listened to. If there are no music files, you will see a mes- sage to this effect. X Confirm the message by pressingW and store the music data (Y page 208).

Switching modes via the audio menu X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If MUSIC REGISTER was the last mode selected, it is now switched on. If another audio source is switched on, you can now switch on the MUSIC REGISTER in the audio menu.

X Select Audio by sliding Z V and turning cVd theCOMANDcontroller and pressW to confirm. The audio menu appears.

X Select Music Register and pressW to confirm.

Switching on with the number buttons X Make sure that neither radio nor disc is activated.

X Press them number key. The MUSIC REGISTER is switched on.

Importing music files

Introduction You can import music files from a CD in the following file formats: RMP3 RWMA RAAC (with file extensions .m4p, .m4a, .m4b and .aac)

X Switch on CD mode (Y page 197). X With an audio CD inserted, select REC in the basic CD display by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. i CD information such as album name, disc name, artist and track is provided by the Gracenote Media Database (Y page 200).

Step 1: selecting tracks to import

: To record all music files (standard) ; To copy single tracks O

= To confirm your selection

208 MUSIC REGISTER Au

di o

X Select Track by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Continue by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

If you do not select any tracks, every track on the CD will be imported.

Step 2: selecting the target folder X Select Folder by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

: To create a new folder (standard) ; Existing folders = Currently selected folder X Select a folder by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

If you do not select a target folder, a new one will be created.

Step 3: beginning the import X Select Start by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Information about the import source and target as well as the progress is displayed. The Audio CD basic display automatically appears after successful import.

X To cancel importing: during importing, confirm Cancel by pressingW the COMAND controller. The Audio CD basic display appears.

Deleting all music files ! In order to prevent malfunctions, do not use COMAND during this time.

This function deletes all music files from the MUSIC REGISTER. X Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 207).

X Select Music Register by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete All Music Files and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears. No is highlighted. If you select Yes, all music files are deleted. You see the Please Wait... message. You will then see the Data deleted mes- sage. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

MUSIC REGISTER 209

Au di o

Z

Calling up memory space info X Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 207).

X Select Music Register by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Memory Info and pressW to con- firm. The following is displayed: Rstorage capacity Ravailable memory Roccupied memory Rcontent (folders, tracks)

Music search

Introduction The music search finds tracks via all available media. The search begins with the audio source that is currently active. The following media are included for the music search: RDisc (CD/MP3) RMemory card RMUSIC REGISTER RUSB storage device X Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 207).

X Select Search by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The category list appears.

X Select a track in a category (Y page 204).

Example: opening a folder X Select Folder in the category list by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You see the content of the current folder.

The name of the current folder is at the top and the track currently playing is indicated by a # dot. X To switch to the next folder up: press the % back button or slide XV the COMAND controller.

Changing the folder/track name X Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 207).

X Select Music Register by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Rename / Delete Files and press W to confirm.

X Select a folder/track by turning cVd. X Select Options by slidingVY and pressW to confirm.

X Select Change and pressW to confirm. X Enter a name for the folder/track (Y page 33).

X To save the changes: select and pressW to confirm.

Deleting folders/tracks X Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 207).

X Select Music Register by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Rename / Delete Files and press W to confirm.

X Select a folder/track by turning cVd.

210 MUSIC REGISTER Au

di o

X Select Options by slidingVY and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears. No is highlighted. If you select Yes, the folders/tracks are deleted. You see the Please Wait... message. You will then see the Data deleted message. If you select No, the process will be can- celed.

Playback options The following options are available: RNormal Track Sequence The tracks are played in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.). RRandom Medium All the tracks on the medium are played in random order. RRandom Track List (MP3 mode only) The tracks in the currently active folder or the current track list are played in a random order.

X To select options: switch to the MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 207).

X Select Music Register by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The options list appears. The # dot indi- cates the option selected.

X Select an option and pressW to confirm. The option is switched on. For all options except Normal Track Sequence, you will see a corresponding display in the display/ selection window.

i The Normal Track Sequence option is automatically selected when you change the disc you are currently listening to or when you select a different medium. If an option is selected, it remains selected after COMAND is switched on or off.

Bluetooth audio mode

Preconditions for the Bluetooth audio device Bluetooth audio mode requires a Blue- tooth-capable audio device. Observe the information in the Bluetooth audio device's operating instructions. Before using Bluetooth audio mode, you should check your Bluetooth audio device for the following: RBluetooth audio profile The Bluetooth audio device must support the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth audio profiles. RBluetooth visibility Certain Bluetooth audio devices do not just require activation of the Bluetooth function. In addition, your device must be made "visible" to other devices. RBluetooth device name This device name is predetermined but can usually be changed. To make a clear selec- tion of the Bluetooth device possible, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you cus- tomize the device name.

i A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile): Bluetooth audio profile for audio data transmission AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile): Bluetooth audio profile for audio data playback.

i Not all Bluetooth audio devices available on the market are equally suitable. To obtain more information about suitable Bluetooth audio devices and about con- necting Bluetooth audio devices to COMAND, visit http://www.mbusa-mobile.com (USA). Or call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assis- tance center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA) or Customer Rela- tions at 1-800-387-0100 (Canada).

Bluetooth audio mode 211

Au di o

Z

X Activate Bluetooth and Bluetooth visibil- ity on the Bluetooth audio device.

Preconditions in COMAND X Activate the Bluetooth function in COMAND (Y page 45).

Connecting Bluetooth audio devices

General information

Before using your Bluetooth audio device with COMAND for the first time, you will need to authorize it. When you authorize a new Bluetooth audio device, it is connected automatically. Con- nection involves first searching for a Blue- tooth audio device and then authorizing it. You can authorize up to fifteen Bluetooth devices.

i If you authorize a mobile phone that sup- ports Bluetooth audio, the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth audio profiles are con- nected automatically. The mobile phone is then entered: Rin the Bluetooth telephone list (Y page 128) Rin the Bluetooth device list (Y page 212).

Mercedes-Benz recommends authorizing a mobile phone in Bluetooth telephony (Y page 128).

Searching for and authorizing a Blue- tooth audio device

Example: Bluetooth device list : Newly detected mobile phone with Blue-

tooth audio function in range ; Bluetooth audio player not within range

but previously authorized (symbol appears in gray)

The Bluetooth device list displays all author- ized devices, whether they are within range or not. After a device search, devices which are within range but not authorized are also dis- played. X Switch on Bluetooth audio mode (Y page 215). If you see the No Bluetooth Audio Device Authorized message, you will need to authorize the Bluetooth audio device first.

X Select BT Audio by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

212 Bluetooth audio mode Au

di o

X Confirm Bluetooth Audio Device List by pressingW the COMAND controller.

X To search: confirm Search for BT Audio Devices by pressing the COMAND controllerW. COMAND searches for Bluetooth audio devices within range and adds them to the Bluetooth device list. If Bluetooth audio devices support the Bluetooth audio pro- files (A2DP, AVRCP), the devices are detec- ted. The duration of the search depends on the number of Bluetooth audio devices within range and their characteristics.

X To authorize: select a Bluetooth audio device that has not yet been authorized from the list (: in the example) by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select the symbol to the right of the Blue- tooth audio device by slidingV Y the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Authorize and pressW to confirm. Depending on the Bluetooth audio device used, you now have two options for con- tinuing with authorization.

X Option 1: enter the passkey (Y page 128). After successful authorization, the Blue- tooth audio device is connected and starts playing.

X Option 2 (Secure Simple Pairing): if the digit codes displayed in COMAND and on the Bluetooth audio device are the same, confirm Yes by pressingW. If you select Yes, authorization continues and the Bluetooth audio device is connec- ted. Playback starts. If you select No, authorization will be can- celed. i The Bluetooth audio device must sup- port Bluetooth version 2.1 for connection via Secure Simple Pairing. COMAND cre- ates a six-digit code, which is displayed on both devices that are to be connected

External authorization

If COMAND does not find your Bluetooth audio device, this may be due to particular security settings on your Bluetooth audio device. In this case, check whether your Blue- tooth audio device can locateCOMAND. The Bluetooth device name of COMAND is MB Bluetooth. X Switch on Bluetooth audio mode (Y page 215).

X Select BT Audio by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Confirm Bluetooth Audio Device List by pressingW the COMAND controller.

X To search: confirm Connect via BT Audio Device by pressing the COMAND controllerW. The duration of the search depends on the number of Bluetooth audio devices within range and their characteristics.

X To authorize: start the authorization on the Bluetooth audio device, see the oper- ating instructions of the Bluetooth audio device. After successful authorization, the Blue- tooth audio device is connected and starts playing.

i With some Bluetooth audio devices, playbackmust first be started on the device itself so that COMAND can play the audio files.

Bluetooth audio mode 213

Au di o

Z

Reconnecting a Bluetooth audio device

The Bluetooth audio profiles are connected automatically under the following circum- stances: Rone of the last two mobile phones to have been connected has also been used as a Bluetooth audio player (if this function is supported by the mobile phone). Rthe mobile phone takes over the automatic connection itself.

A Bluetooth audio player without telephone functions is not automatically reconnected, even if it was the last device connected. If the No Bluetooth Audio Device Con nected message appears, you have two options to connect a Bluetooth audio device: Connecting last device X Confirm Connect Last Device in the basic display by pressingW the COMAND controller. If COMAND can locate the Bluetooth audio device, it will be connected and start playing. i With some Bluetooth audio devices, playbackmust first be started on the device itself so that COMAND can play the audio files.

Connecting a device from a list X Select BT Audio by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Confirm Bluetooth Audio Device List by pressingW the COMAND controller.

X Select a Bluetooth audio device by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If COMAND can locate the Bluetooth audio device, it will be connected and start playing. i With some Bluetooth audio devices, playback must be initially started on the

device itself so that COMAND can play the audio files.

Bluetooth audio device and simultane- ous search for mobile phones During the search for mobile phones, the con- nection with the Bluetooth audio device is terminated (Y page 127). In the Bluetooth audio basic display, youwill see the No Blue tooth Audio Device Connected message and the Connect Last Device menu item cannot be selected.

Displaying details X Select a Bluetooth audio device in the Bluetooth device list.

X Select the symbol to the right of the Blue- tooth audio device by slidingV Y the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Details and pressW to confirm. The following information concerning the selected mobile phone is shown: RBluetooth name RBluetooth address Ravailability status (shown after an update) Rauthorization status

X To close the detailed view: turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller.

De-authorizing (deregistering) a Blue- tooth audio device X Select a Bluetooth audio device in the Bluetooth device list.

X Select the symbol to the right of the Blue- tooth audio device by slidingV Y the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

214 Bluetooth audio mode Au

di o

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to deauthorize this device.

X Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, the device will be deleted from the Bluetooth device list. If you select No, the process will be can- celed. i Before re-authorizing the Bluetooth audio device, you should also delete the device name MB Bluetooth from your Bluetooth audio device's Bluetooth list. See the Bluetooth audio device's operat- ing instructions.

Switching to Bluetooth audio mode

The Bluetooth audio basic display

Example: Bluetooth audio basic display : Track name ; Current playback settings (no symbol for

"Normal track sequence") = Album name ? Sound settings A Media list B Artist C To stop or start playback D To connect a Bluetooth audio device, to

increase the volume on COMAND E Bluetooth audio data medium type F Data medium position in the media list

i If the Bluetooth audio device connected supportsmetadata and corresponding data

is available, then the artist, track and album name can be displayed.

Using the Bluetooth audio basic dis- play X Connect Bluetooth audio devices (Y page 212)

or X Reconnect the Bluetooth audio device (Y page 214). COMAND activates the Bluetooth audio device. The basic display appears and the device starts playing.

Using the DISC button X Press the h button one or more times. By pressing the h button repeatedly, you can switch modes in the following order: RCD/MP3 (disc) RMemory card mode RMUSIC REGISTER RUSB storage device RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode RBluetooth audio mode

Using the media list X Select Bluetooth Audio in the media list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm (Y page 198). COMAND activates the connected device. You will see a message to this effect. The basic display then appears.

Starting/stopping playback X To start playback: select by sliding V and turning cVd the COMAND con- troller and pressW to confirm. Playback starts. is selected.

Bluetooth audio mode 215

Au di o

Z

X To stop playback: select by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A message appears. is selected.

X To continue playback: select by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A message appears. is selected.

Restarting playback after stopping

During the search for mobile phones , the connection with the Bluetooth audio device is terminated (Y page 127). In the Bluetooth audio basic display (Y page 215), you will see the No Bluetooth Audio Device Connec tedmessage and the Connect Last Device menu item cannot be selected. When the search is finished, the Bluetooth audio device can be reconnected. X Confirm Connect Last Device by press- ingW. Depending on the Bluetooth audio device used, playback starts immediately or you must start playback manually. In this case, you will see the Bluetooth Audio Device Paused message.

X To start playback: select by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Playback resumes from the beginning.

Selecting a track The function is not supported by all Blue- tooth audio devices. X To skip forward or back to a track: press theE orF button on COMAND.

or X Press the9 or: button briefly on the multifunction steering wheel.

X Rapid scroll: press and hold the9 or: button on the multifunction steer- ing wheel until the desired track is reached. If you press and hold the9 or: button, the rapid scrolling speed is increased.

Selecting playback options If the Bluetooth audio device supports the corresponding function, the following options are available: RNormal Track Sequence The tracks are played in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.). Audio data playback is determined by the order in which the tracks are written to the data carrier. Alphabetical order is the most common. Once all the tracks in a folder

216 Bluetooth audio mode Au

di o

have been played, the tracks in the next folder are played. RRandom Tracks All the tracks on the medium are played in random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.).

X Select BT Audio by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The # dot indicates the option selected.

X Select the option by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. If you select Random Tracks, you will see a corresponding symbol in the display/ selection window.

Increasing the volume on COMAND

X Select BT Audio by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Volume and pressW to confirm. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select Standard or Boost and pressW to confirm.

Information about sound settings (Y page 30) You will find further information in the "Audio AUX mode" section (Y page 223)

Operation with the Media Interface

Connection options

Overview You will find the connection sockets in the center console stowage compartment. Device-specific adapter cables are required to connect external devices to the Media Interface. Country-specific versions are sup- plied with the Media Interface (Y page 218). You can connect the following data carriers to COMAND via the Media Interface: RiPod RiPhone Rcertain MP3 players

i Store individual parts in a safe place. Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz connec- tion cables.

i iPod and iPhone are registered trade- marks of Apple Inc., Cupertino, California, USA.

i MP3 players that support MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) can be used. This allows theMP3 player to be easily con- nected to theMedia Interface and removed after use. Audio data is played without problem. On someMP3 players, you have to activate the relevant function; see the MP3 player operating instructions.

Supported devices For details and a list of supported devices, visit http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Customer Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).

Operation with the Media Interface 217

Au di o

Z

Connecting an external device Do not leave external devices in the vehicle. They may malfunction in extreme tempera- tures; see the operating instructions for the respective device. Examples of extreme tem- peratures are direct sunlight or very low out- side temperatures. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC accepts no liability for damage to external devices.

i Never connect more than one device at a time. You will otherwise not be able to play back from the external device. USB hubs (devices with several USB con- nections) are not supported.

: Four-pin socket for inch stereo jack, e.g. for MP3 players (audio and video)

; iPod plug for connecting an iPod = USB socket for connecting an MP3 player ? Example of device: iPod

X Connect the external device with suitable socket:,; or=. COMAND activates the device, a display appears (when connecting an iPod plug or USB socket).

If you remove a device, the No Device Con nected message appears. i A connected iPod or MP3 player should not be simultaneously operated via the Media Interface and the remote control (e.g. Bluetooth remote control) or directly via the device itself. This may cause unfore- seen technical difficulties.

Applications (Apps) that are activated on the connected device may lead to malfunc- tions.

i Connecting a fully discharged iPod or MP3 player can result in an extended initi- alization period.

Malfunction messages appear while the device is being activated if: Rthe connected device is not supported (External Device Unavailable mes- sage). Rthe connected device consumes too much power. Rthe Media Interface connection is faulty. Ra mass storage device (e.g. a USB memory stick or USB hard drive) is connected to the Media Interface. In this case the Please connect the device to the other USB port mes- sage appears.

i The separate USB connection ensures quick access and expanded media content options.

i Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if you have further questions.

Disconnecting an iPod

X Press the release catch on iPod plug; and pull the iPod cable from the iPod, see the separate cable kit instructions.

Switching to Media Interface mode

General notes In extreme cases, starting up individual func- tions can take up to several minutes this depends on the external device and its con- tent (e.g. video podcasts). Only use the original software to save files on iPods orMP3players. Otherwise, someor all functions may not be available.

218 Operation with the Media Interface Au

di o

Switching on automatically X Connect an external device (Y page 218). COMAND activates the device (if connec- ted via the iPod connector or USB socket). The basic display then appears.

Switching on using the DISC button The external device is connected to theMedia Interface. X Press the h button one or more times. By pressing the DISC button repeatedly, you can switch modes in the following order: RCD/MP3 (disc) RMemory card mode RMUSIC REGISTER RUSB storage device RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode RBluetooth audio mode

Switching on using a number key X Press theo number key (single DVD drive). This selects the connected external audio device directly.

Switching on via the media list

Media Interface mode (iPod mode) : Cover (if available) or representation of

device ; Track number = Elapsed track time (also in format

00:00:00 for audio books)

? Track name A Graphic time display B Track position in playlist C Album name (if available) D Artist (if available) E Music search F Position in the media list G Type of data medium H Playback options X In the media list, turn cVd the COMAND controller to select the entry under position 5 and pressW to confirm (Y page 198). COMAND activates the connected device. You will see a message to this effect. The basic display then appears. If no device is connected, you will see the Media Interface entry instead of a device name.

The type of device connected is indicated by the corresponding symbol for iPod (iPhone) or MP3 player. The current playback option is shown with a symbol after the album name (no display for Normal Track Sequence) (Y page 222).

i If the device connected does not contain any playable tracks, a message appears to this effect.

Selecting music files

Note COMAND displays the data stored on the iPod, iPhone or MP3 player according to the file structure used in the respective medium.

Operation with the Media Interface 219

Au di o

Z

Selecting by skipping to a track X To skip forwards or back to a track: turn cVd the COMAND controller when the dis- play/selection window is active.

or X Press theE orF button. The skip forward function skips to the next track. The skip back function skips to the beginning of the current track if the track has been playing for more than eight sec- onds. If the track has been playing for less than eight seconds, it skips to the start of the previous track. If you have selected a playback option other than Normal Track Sequence, the track sequence is random.

Selecting using the number keypad X To make an entry: press the l button. An input menu appears. The number of characters available for input depends on the number of stored tracks.

X To enter a track number: press a number key, e.g.q. The digit is entered in the first position in the input line. i COMAND will ignore and not display an invalid digit.

X Enter more numbers if desired. The track plays after the last possible num- ber is entered. i Pressing and holding a number key for more than two seconds completes the entry, and the corresponding track is played.

Fast forwarding/rewinding X While the display/selection window is active, slide X V Y and hold the COMAND controller until the desired position has been reached.

or X Press and hold theE orF button until the desired position is reached.

i On an iPod or iPhone, fast rewind only functions within the current track.

Selecting a category/playlist/folder

Overview

For an iPod, iPhone or certainMP3 players, you can select tracks using categories or fold- ers. Depending on the device connected, the fol- lowing categories may be available, for exam- ple: RCurrent Tracklist RSelect By Cover RKeyword Search RPlaylists (e.g. All) RArtists RAlbums RTracks RPodcasts RGenres RComposers RAudiobooks RVideos (except for Hong Kong) i Some playback categories contain the entry All. If this entry has been selected, the entire content of the category selected will be played. The Videos category is available for iPods and iPhones (except for Hong Kong).

i The functions are available as soon as the entire media content has been read and analyzed. For certain functions, such as keyword search and selection by cover, this can take severalminutes, depending on the scope of media and the connected device. If the same device is reconnected with unchanged media content, these functions are available much more quickly. However, if you change the media content, it has to be read and analyzed again.

220 Operation with the Media Interface Au

di o

Calling up a category list

Example: category list X Select Search in the basic display by slid- ingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The category list appears.

i Search is not available until the device has been activated.

i Reading: if the media content of the con- nected device is being read, this is indica- ted on the upper right by a symbol. When reading has ended, the categories Select By Cover and Keyword Search are avail- able. Depending on the connected device and the size of the media content, reading may take several minutes. When the device is next started or reconnected, the advanced functions will be quickly available. However, if you change the media content on your iPod/iPhone, it has to be read and analyzed again.

Example: current track list : Symbol for next folder up ; Device icon and device name = Track symbol ? Current title X Select Current Tracklist by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The content of the current track list appears.

X Select the track by turning c V d the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The track is played.

X To switch to the next folder up: slide XV the COMAND controller.

or X Press the k back button.

Playing back the content of a category or folder X Select the category or folder by turning c V d the COMAND controller.

X PressW the COMAND controller for longer than 2 seconds. The content of the category or folder selec- ted is played in accordance with the play- back option selected (Y page 222) .

Alphabetical track selection

iPod, iPhone and MP3 player This function is available for alphabetically sorted categories and folders. This function is

Operation with the Media Interface 221

Au di o

Z

not available for albums or playlists, for exam- ple. X Select a category, e.g. Artists, by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The available artists are displayed.

X Press the corresponding number key once or repeatedly to select the initial letter of the desired artist. For example, to select an artist whose name begins with C, press the l number key three times. The available letters are listed at the lower edge of the display. After a message, the first entry in the list which matches the letter entered is high- lighted. i If no corresponding entry exists, the last entry corresponding to a previous letter is highlighted instead.

i iPods and MP3 players: the quality of the search results is highly dependent on the version and language variant of the soft- ware used to populate the device. A well- known example of such software is iTunes. If different sorting rules are defined (e.g. in iTunes), the search is canceled without any result.

Additional selection functions RSelect By Cover Albums can be chosen by cover using the menu item. The first time the Select By Cover func- tion is used, additional datamust be loaded from the iPod/iPhone. The current music playback is interrupted to allow access to this data. The processmay take a few minutes and should not be canceled. Otherwise it will start again from the begin- ning the next time Select By Cover is selected. Covers are initially searched for in the Gracenote Media Database and are then added to during playback from the connected device (Y page 200). The avail-

ability depends on the use and the tracks already selected. RKeyword Search Selecting keyword search allows you to search through all categories on the con- nected device for keywords.

i More information on Select By Cover and Keyword Search can be found under "Music search, selecting category" (Y page 220).

i For an iPod/iPhone, the available cov- ers are added most efficiently if the entire media content is in the current playlist. This is the case if you have selected the play- back option Tracks or Random Medium (Y page 222).

Special feature in iPod/iPhonemode

i If the connected iPod/iPhone is not functioning or paused, you can search for tracks but cannot select them. After con- firming a new track, the Function Unavailable message appears.

Playback options X To select a playback option: select Media Interface in the basic display by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The options list appears. The # dot indi- cates the option selected.

X Select an option and pressW to confirm. The following options are available: RNormal Track Sequence Normal track sequence: you hear the tracks in their normal order (e.g. numerical or alphabetical). RRandom Medium All the tracks on the medium are played in random order. RRandom Track List

222 Operation with the Media Interface Au

di o

The tracks in the currently active category or folder, including any subfolders, are played in random order.

i If the connected iPod/iPhone is not functioning or paused, the playback options are inactive. The display of options is grayed out.

MP3 player instructions

General information Up to 30,000 tracks per medium are suppor- ted. You can speed up some functions and improve the search results by: Rmaking sure the names of tracks, albums and artists, for example, are written the same way Rlabeling albums featuring various artists as "compilations"

i Multiple entries of tracks in playlists are filtered out for some players.

Data formats MP3 andWMA are supported as data formats with fixed and variable bit rates (up to 320 kbits/s).

Special considerationswhen usingMP3 players Up to eight directory levels with up to 1,000 tracks per directory are supported. Do not use USB extension leads or adapters. They can impair functionality.

i DRM (Digital RightsManagement) protec- ted files are not supported by the Media Interface.

Audio AUX mode

Notes on audio AUX mode External audio sources may have different volumes, which can mean that system mes- sages such as traffic announcements and navigation system announcements are much louder. If necessary, deactivate the system messages or adjust their volume manually. You can connect an external audio source (AUX) to COMAND. Depending on the vehicle model series, the connection is made using a jack in the stow- age compartment in the center console or a USB port (Y page 197). If COMAND is equipped with the Media Inter- face, external audio sources are connected using the cable set provided. An AUX socket is not provided. The connections for the Media Interface are located in the stowage compartment in the center console.

i You will find further information online at http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Cus- tomer Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).

Switching to audio AUX mode

Switching on using the DISC button The external device is connected to the audio AUX input. X Press the h button one or more times. By pressing the function button repeatedly, you can change the operating mode in the following order: RCD/MP3 (disc) RMemory card mode RMUSIC REGISTER RUSB storage device

Audio AUX mode 223

Au di o

Z

RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode RBluetooth audio mode

Switching modes via the audio menu When you connect an external audio source, audio AUX is not selected automatically. X Select Audio in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If AUX mode was the last mode selected, it will now be active. If another audio source is switched on, you can now switch to audio AUX mode in the audio menu.

X Select Audio using ZV and pressW to confirm. The audio menu appears.

X Select Aux by turning cVd and pressW to confirm. The audio AUX menu appears. The medium in the external audio source is played if the source is connected and playback selec- ted.

Please see the respective operating instruc- tions for how to operate the external audio source. Information on: RVolume settings (Y page 29) RSound settings (Y page 30)

Increasing the volume on COMAND

X Select Volume in the AUX display by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select Standard or Boost and pressW to confirm. Standard: the volume of the external audio source is adjusted to a standard value. Boost: the volume of the external audio source is raised by approximately 10 dB.

A device which is connected as an external audio source may seem quieter or louder in the vehicle, or the usual maximum volume cannot be achieved. On some devices, it is possible to adjust the volume separately. In this case, start at a medium volume and increase it gradually. This enables you to determine whether the system is able to play themusic at high volumewithout distorting it.

224 Audio AUX mode Au

di o

Your COMAND equipment ................ 226 General information ......................... 226 Basic settings .................................... 226 Video DVD mode ............................... 226 Video AUX mode ............................... 231 Picture viewer ................................... 232

225

Vi de o

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described.

General information

Automatic picture shutoff The video image is only displayed for the driver when the transmission lever is in posi- tion P. SPLITVIEW allows the front passenger to view the video image (Y page 37). When the transmission lever is disengaged from position P, the following message appears in the display: In order not to distract you from the traffic situa tion, the picture is faded out while the vehicle is in motion. As soon as the selector lever of the transmis- sion is returned to position P, the video image is shown.

Basic settings

Adjusting the brightness, contrast or color X In video DVD or video AUXmode, press the W COMAND Controller. The menu is shown.

X Select DVD-Video or Aux by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select Brightness, Contrast or Color by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Set the value between - 5 and + 5 and press W to confirm.

Changing the picture format X PressW the COMAND controller. The menu is shown.

X Select DVD-Video by slidingV and turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select 16:9 Optimized, 4:3 or Wide screen and pressW to confirm. The dot in front of the entry indicates the currently selected format.

X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

Video DVD mode

Important safety notes

G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiation. This laser radiation could damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. Never open the housing. Always have main- tenance and repair work carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop.

G WARNING Handling discs while driving may distract you from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Handle discs only when the vehicle is station- ary.

Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

226 Video DVD mode Vi de o

Notes on discs ! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs. They could peel off and damage COMAND. Stickers can cause the disc to bend, which can result in read errors and disc recogni- tion problems.

! COMAND is designed to play discs that complywith the EN60908 standard. There- fore, you can only use discs with a maxi- mum thickness of 1.3 mm. If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that contain data on both sides (DVD on one side and audio data on the other), they can- not be ejected and can damage the device. Only use round discs with a diameter of 12 cm. Do not use discs with a diameter of 8 cm, even with an adapter.

Playback problems may occur when playing copied discs. There are a large variety of discs, DVD authoring software, writing soft- ware andwriters available. This varietymeans that there is no guarantee that the systemwill be able to play discs that you have copied yourself.

DVD playback conditions If video DVDs do not conform to the NTSC or PAL TV standards, they may create picture, sound or other problems during playback. COMAND is capable of playing back video DVDs produced according to the following standards: RRegion code 1 or region code 0 (no region code) RPAL or NTSC standard You will generally find the relevant details either on the DVD itself or on the DVD case.

i If you insert a video DVD with a different region code, you will see a message to this effect.

i COMAND is set to region code 1 at the factory. This setting can be changed at an

authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. This will allow you to play video DVDs with a differ- ent region code, provided that they are pro- duced in accordance with the PAL or NTSC standard. The region code can be changed up to five times.

Function restrictions Depending on the DVD, it is possible that cer- tain functions or actions will be temporarily blocked or may not function at all. As soon as you try to activate these functions or actions, you will see theK symbol in the display.

Inserting and removing DVDs X Proceed as described in the "Inserting and ejecting CDs and DVDs" section (Y page 196).

Switching to video DVD mode

Switching on automatically X Insert a video DVD. COMAND loads the medium inserted and starts to play it.

Switching on using the DISC button X Press the h button. COMAND switches to the previous disc operating mode.

By pressing the h button repeatedly, you can switch modes in the following order: Rvideo DVD/CD/MP3 in the single DVD drive (disc mode) Rmemory card mode RMUSIC REGISTER RUSB storage device RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode RBluetooth audio mode

Video DVD mode 227

Vi de o

Z

X Select Media by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select a video DVD from the media list (Y page 230).

Switching on with the video menu X Select Video in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Video DVD mode is switched on.

Showing/hiding the control menu X To show: in DVD video mode, slide ZV the COMAND controller.

X To hide: slide ZV the COMAND control- ler.

or X Wait for approximately eight seconds.

Control menu displayed : Type of data medium ; Current title = Current scene ? Track time A Shows the menu

i This function is not available while the DVD's own menu is being displayed.

Showing/hiding the menu X To show: in full-screen DVD video mode, pressW the COMAND controller.

or X Select Menu while the control menu is shown and pressW to confirm.

X To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller and confirm Full Screen by pressingW.

Menu shown : Video DVD options ; Pause function = Stop function ? Media selection A Sound settings

i This function is not available while the DVD's own menu is being displayed.

Fast forwarding/rewinding X In full-screen DVD video mode, slide XVY and hold the COMAND controller until the desired position is reached.

or X Press and hold theE orF button until the desired position is reached. You see the control menu.

228 Video DVD mode Vi de o

Stop function X Show the menu (Y page 228). X To interrupt playback: select by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The display changes to. The video image is hidden.

X To continue playback: select and pressW to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it was interrupted.

X To stop playback: while playback is inter- rupted, select again and pressW to confirm.

or X During playback, confirm by pressing W twice in rapid succession. is selected.

X To restart playback: confirm by pressingW. Playback restarts from the beginning.

Pause function X Show the menu (Y page 228). X To pause playback: select by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The display changes to.

X To continue playback: select and pressW to confirm. The menu is hidden.

Selecting a scene/chapter If the film is divided into scenes or chapters, you can select them directly while the film is running, or skip forwards step by step. Some DVDs do not permit this at certain points (e.g. during the opening credits). It may also be possible to select the scene/ chapter from within the menu stored on the DVD.

X To skip forwards or back: in full screen mode, turn cVd the COMAND controller.

or X Slide XVY the COMAND controller. or X Press theE orF button on the con- trol panel. The navigation menu (Y page 228) appears for approximately eight seconds.

Selecting a film/track

DVD function menu

This function is only available if the DVD is divided into several films/titles. If the DVD contains several films, these can be selected directly. A film can be selected either when the DVD is being played back or when it is stopped. The film can also be selected from the menu on the DVD itself. X Show the menu (Y page 228). X Select DVD-Video by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select DVD Functions and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select Title Selection by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select a film/title and pressW to confirm.

Video DVD mode 229

Vi de o

Z

Selecting a video DVD from themedia list X Show the menu (Y page 228). X Select Media by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The media list appears. The# dot indicates the current medium being played. Video DVDs are indicated by the icon.

X PressW the COMAND controller. COMAND loads the video DVD and begins playing it.

i If you select a CD or an MP3medium, you switch to the respective audio mode. Further information on the media list (Y page 198).

DVD menu

Calling up the DVD menu TheDVDmenu is themenu stored on theDVD itself. It is structured in various ways accord- ing to the individual DVD and permits certain actions and settings. In the case of multi-language DVDs, for exam- ple, you can change the DVD language in the DVD menu. X Show the menu (Y page 228). X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and pressW to confirm.

X Select Menu and pressW to confirm. The DVD menu appears.

Selecting menu items in the DVD menu

X Show the DVD menu (Y page 230). X Select a menu item by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

or X Select a menu item by sliding XVY the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. The menu appears.

X To reconfirm your selection: confirm Select by pressingW. COMAND carries out the action. Make a selection from the further options, if necessary. COMAND then switches back to the DVD menu. i Menu items which cannot be selected are shown in gray.

i Depending on the DVD, the menu items: Back (to movie), Play, Stop,K, L or Go Upmay either not function at all or may not function at certain points in the DVD menu. To indicate this, theK symbol appears in the display.

Moving up one level in the DVD menu X Show the DVD menu (Y page 230). X Select the corresponding menu item in the DVDmenu and pressW the COMAND con- troller to confirm.

or

230 Video DVD mode Vi de o

X Select any menu item in the DVDmenu and pressW the COMAND controller to con- firm.

X Select Go Up and pressW to confirm.

Back to the film X Press the k back button repeatedly until you see the movie.

or X Select the corresponding menu item from the DVD menu.

X Select the Back (to movie)menu item in the menu and pressW to confirm.

Setting the language and audio for- mat This function is not available on all DVDs. If it is available, you can set the DVD menu lan- guage, the audio language or the audio for- mat. The number of settings is determined by the DVD content. It is possible that the set- tings may also be accessed in the DVD menu (Y page 230). X Show the DVD menu (Y page 230). X In full-screen mode, pressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.

X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and pressW to confirm.

X Select Menu Language or Audio Lan guage and pressW to confirm. In both cases, a menu appears after a few seconds. The# dot in front of an entry indi- cates the currently selected language.

X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

Subtitles and camera angle These functions are not available on all DVDs. The number of subtitle languages and camera angles available depends on the content of theDVD. Itmay also be possible to access the settings from the DVD menu. X Show the DVD menu (Y page 230). X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and pressW to confirm.

X Select Subtitles or Camera Angle and pressW to confirm. In both cases, amenu appears. The# dot in front of an entry indicates the current set- ting.

X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

Interactive content DVDs can contain interactive content (e.g. a video game). In a video game, for example, youmay be able to influence events by select- ing and triggering actions. The type and num- ber of actions depend on the DVD. X Select an action by sliding ZV or XVY the COMAND controller and pressW to exe- cute it. Amenu appears and the first entry, Select, is highlighted.

X PressW the COMAND controller.

Video AUX mode

Connecting external video sources External video sources may have different volumes, which can mean that system mes- sages such as traffic announcements and navigation system announcements are much louder. If necessary, deactivate the system messages or adjust their volume manually.

Video AUX mode 231

Vi de o

Z

If your vehicle is equipped with Media Inter- face, you can connect an external video source (AUX video) (Y page 217). The 1/8 inch audio/video jacks are in the center console stowage compartment.

i In vehicles with a rear view camera, the AUX video jack cannot be used for external video sources.

Switching to AUX video mode

AUX video mode X Press the h function button repeatedly until Media Interface mode is selected.

or X Select Video in the main function bar by turning cV d the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If AUX videomodewas the last mode selec- ted, it will now be active. If another video source is switched on, you can now switch to AUX video mode in the video menu.

X Select Video and pressW to confirm. X Select Aux and pressW to confirm. The AUX video menu appears. You will hear and see the content of the external video source if it is connected and switched to playback.

Showing/hiding the menu X To show: in video AUX mode, pressW the COMAND controller.

X To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller and confirm Full Screen by pressingW.

Volume and sound settings Information on: RVolume settings (Y page 29) RSound settings (Y page 30)

i A device which is connected as an exter- nal video source may seem quieter or louder in the vehicle, or the usual maximum volume cannot be achieved. On some devi- ces, it is possible to adjust the volume sep- arately. In this case, start at a medium vol- ume and increase it gradually. This enables you to determine whether the system is able to play the sound at high volume with- out distorting it.

Increasing the volume on COMAND X Show the video AUX menu (Y page 232). X Select Volume by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. A menu appears. The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select Standard or Boost and pressW to confirm. Standard: the volume of the external video source is adjusted to a standard value. Boost: the volume of the external video source is raised by approximately 10 dB.

Picture viewer

Introduction If there are pictures on the active data medium, you can look at them. You can dis-

232 Picture viewer Vi de o

play pictures with a resolution of up to 20 megapixels.

Data medium Supported picture formats

CD/DVD with pic- ture files

bmp, jpeg, jpg, png

USB devices (sticks, hard drives) SD memory card

bmp, jpeg, jpg, png

Calling up a category list X Select a data medium with pictures (e.g. a memory card): Rin the Audio menu (Y page 186) Rin the media list (Y page 198)

X Select Search in the basic display by slid- ingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The category list appears (Y page 204).

Displaying pictures X Select (Y page 204) Photos in the category list by turning cVd theCOMANDcontroller and pressW to confirm. A folder directory appears.

X Select a folder with photos and pressW to confirm. The folder displays the existing picture files (example).

X Select a photo and pressW to confirm. The photo is displayed and the music is stopped.

Changing the picture view

X While viewing a picture (Y page 233), press W the COMAND controller. A menu appears.

X To turn the picture clockwise: confirm Turn Clockwise by pressingW the COMAND controller.

X To turn the picture counter-clockwise: select Turn Counterclockwise by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

X To zoom into a picture: select Zoom by turning the cVd COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. After you have zoomed into the picture, you can move the section of the picture.

X Slide ZV and XVY the COMAND control- ler.

Picture viewer 233

Vi de o

Z

X To revert to the original size: pressW the COMAND controller.

or X Press the k button.

Exiting the picture viewer X Select Back To Menu in the menu by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

234 Picture viewer Vi de o

Your COMAND equipment ................ 236 Overview ............................................ 236 Basic functions ................................. 241 System settings ................................ 243 CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode ........ 244 Video DVD mode ............................... 247 Operation with an active COMAND source ................................................ 252 AUX mode .......................................... 254

235

Re ar Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described.

Overview

Important safety notes

G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiation. This laser radiation could damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. Never open the housing. Always have main- tenance and repair work carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop.

G WARNING If objects such as headphones/headsets or external audio/video sources are not secured in the passenger compartment, they can be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, for example in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direc- tion. Always stow these items or similar objects carefully so that they cannot be flung around, for example in a lockable vehicle stowage compartment.

equipment Observe that a range of Rear Seat Entertain- ment Systems are available for Mercedes- Benz vehicles. In this Operator's Manual, the Rear Seat Entertainment System Code 864 is used for illustration purposes. If you have a different Rear Seat Entertainment System in

your vehicle, please refer to the separate prin- ted operating instructions .

Components The Rear Seat Entertainment System includes: Rtwo screens for the rear behind the front- seat head restraints Rtwo remote controls Ra CD/DVD drive RAUX jacks on both screens (AUX display) and on the CD/DVD drive (AUX drive) Rtwo sets of cordless headphones

236 Overview Re ar Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Rear-compartment screens

: AUX jacks, detailed view in the "CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks" section (Y page 238). ; Display

Remote control

Overview

: Switches the screen on/off ; Switches the button lighting on/off = Selects the screen for the remote control ? Selects a menu or menu item A Confirms a selection or setting B Switches the sound on or off C Adjusts the volume D Skips to a track, fast-forward/fast-rewind E Selects a track; direct entry F Exits a menu (back)

i Two remote controls are supplied for the US and Canadian markets.

Selecting the screen for the remote con- trol The remote control can be used to operate one of the two rear-compartment screens or SPLITVIEW for the front passenger. To do so, you must switch the remote control to the desired screen (Y page 237). X To select the left-hand screen: turn thumb- wheel= until "LREAR" is highlighted in the window.

X To select the right-hand screen: turn thumbwheel= until "R REAR" is highligh- ted in the window.

X To select SPLITVIEW: turn thumbwheel= until "SPLITVIEW" is highlighted in the win- dow.

Switching the screen on/off If the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock (see vehicle Operator's Manual), or if it is not in the ignition lock, the rear-com- partment screens will switch off after 30 minutes. Before the screens switch off, they show a message to this effect. You can switch the screens back on. How- ever, this will discharge the starter battery.

Overview 237

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

X Point the remote control at the rear-com- partment screen which has been selected for remote operation.

X Press button: on the remote control (Y page 237). The respective rear-compartment screen switches on or off. i You can only switch the screens on using the remote control if the ignition is switched on.

Switching the button lighting on/off X Press button; on the remote control (Y page 237). Depending on the previous status, the but- ton lighting is switched on or off.

i If you do not use the remote control for about 15 seconds, the button lighting switches off automatically.

Switching the sound on or off X Press buttonB on the remote control (Y page 237). The sound is switched on/off.

Selecting a menu/menu item and con- firming your selection X Select a menu/menu item using the =;9: buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks

: CD/DVD slot ; AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal

(red) = AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal

(white) ? AUX, video (V) jack (yellow) A CD/DVD eject button The AUX jacks shown are for the AUX drive. Identical jacks can be found on the right-hand side of the rear-compartment screens (AUX display) (Y page 237).

238 Overview Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Cordless headphones

Overview

X To adjust the headphones: open both sides of the headphones. X Adjust the fitting of the headphones by pulling the headphone band in the direction of the arrow.

X To switch the headphones on/off: press on/off switch;. X To adjust the volume: turn volume control= until the desired volume is set. If you have connected corded headphones to a rear-compartment screen, you can adjust the volume using the remote control (Y page 237).

X To check the battery condition of charge: check the state of the batteries using indicator lamp:.

i To preserve the batteries, the headphones automatically switch off if they have not received an audio signal for approximately 3 minutes.

Indicator lamp on the cordless head- phones The color of the indicator lamp shows: Rwhether the device is switched on or off Rthe condition of the inserted batteries

LED dis- play

Status

Green The batteries are fine.

Red The batteries are almost dis- charged.

Lit continu- ously

The headphones are switched on and connected to a screen.

LED dis- play

Status

Flashing The headphones are search- ing for the connection to a screen.

No display (dark)

The headphones are switched off or the batteries are dis- charged.

i The function of the headphones may be impaired by other radio-based electronic devices such as mobile phones or laptops.

Overview 239

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

Selecting the screen for the head- phones

X Slide switch: to L (left-hand screen) or R (right-hand screen).

Connecting additional headphones Up to two cordless headphones can be used at the same time for each screen. You can also connect one additional set of corded headphones to each of the two rear- compartment screens (Y page 237). The socket is designed for headphones with a 3.5mm stereo jack plug and an impedance of 32 ohms.

Replacing batteries

Notes

G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seekmedical attention immediately.

H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified spe- cialist workshop or a special collection point for used bat- teries.

Batteries are required for the remote control and for the two sets of cordless headphones. The batteries can be replaced (Y page 240).

Replacing the batteries of the remote control

: Battery compartment ; Catch tab = Battery compartment cover ? Retaining lugs A Batteries The remote control contains 2 typeAAA, 1.5 V batteries.

240 Overview Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

X To open the battery compartment: remove battery compartment cover= on the back of the remote control.

X To do so, press down retaining lug; and take off battery compartment cover=.

X Remove discharged batteriesA from the tray.

X Insert the new batteries. Observe the polar- ity markings on the batteries and battery compartment when doing so. Left-hand battery: the positive pole (+) must face upwards. Right-hand battery: the positive pole (+) must face downwards.

X To close the battery compartment: insert battery compartment cover= start- ing with retaining lugs? into the battery compartment and allow catch tab; to engage in place.

Replacing cordless headphone batter- ies

The battery compartment is located on the left headphone. The cordless headphones require two type AAA, 1.5 V batteries.

X To open the battery compartment: turn battery compartment cover: counter- clockwise and remove.

X Remove the discharged batteries from the tray.

X Insert the new batteries. Observe the polar- ity markings on the batteries and battery tray when doing so.

X To close the battery compartment: replace battery housing cover: and turn it clockwise until it engages. If the batteries have been inserted cor- rectly, the indicator lamp will light up green when the headphones are switched on.

i The operating duration of the headphones with a set of batteries is up to 40 hours.

Basic functions

Using headphones You can use the cordless headphones sup- plied and/or up to two sets of corded head- phones connected to the corresponding jack of the rear-compartment screens (Y page 237). Information on the cordless headphones (Y page 239).

Using the main loudspeakers This function is available in conjunction with COMAND. You can use the vehicle loudspeakers to lis- ten to a disc inserted in the rear-compartment drive. To do so, at least one of the rear-com- partment screens must be set to disc mode. X To set on COMAND: press the $ but- ton, for example, to switch on an audio mode.

X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The Audio menu appears.

X Select Rear by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Basic functions 241

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

i The headphones' volume setting does not affect the main loudspeakers.

Selecting sound settings You can select the sound settings in the CD/ MP3, video DVD and AUX modes. X Switch on an operating mode (e.g. audio CD mode) (Y page 244).

X Select Treble or Bass using the:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. An adjustment scale appears.

X Select a setting using the9: but- tons and press the 9 button to confirm.

Multiple users

Simultaneous use of the rear-compart- ment disc drive The two rear-compartment screens can be operated almost entirely independently from one another. However, there can be a conflict in some menus if the two screens are used simultaneously. If the rear-compartment disc drive is being used for both screens simultaneously, select- ing certain menus or settings on one of the screens also affects the other screen. The following functions affect both screens: Rchanging playback options Rselecting a track (from a track list or folder) Rusing the play, pause and stop functions Rfast forwarding/rewinding or scrolling Rcalling up the DVD menu and navigating within it Rsetting the language, subtitles and camera angle Rcalling up interactive DVD content

The following functions affect only one screen: Raudio and video functions as well as picture settings Rswitching between full screen and the menu

Switching between operating modes When you exit an operating mode (e.g. audio CD mode), the current setting is saved. If you call up this operating mode again later, there are two possibilities: Rthe operating mode has been changed on the other screen. Rthe operating mode has not been changed. In the first case, the operating mode appears as it is on the other screen. In the second case, the setting appears on the screen as it was when you last exited the operating mode.

Picture settings

Overview You can select picture settings in video DVD and AUX mode (Y page 254).

Adjusting the brightness, contrast and color

Example: TV mode : Brightness, contrast and color ; Picture formats

242 Basic functions Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

X Switch on video DVD mode (Y page 247). X To show themenu: press the9 button on the remote control.

or X While the navigation menu is shown, (Y page 228) select Menu and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select DVD-Video using the:=; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Brightness, Contrast or Color using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. An adjustment scale appears.

X Select a setting using the9: but- tons and press the 9 button to confirm.

Changing the picture format X To show themenu: press the9 button on the remote control.

or X While the navigation menu is shown, (Y page 228) select Menu and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select DVD-Video using the:=; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The dot in front of one of the menu items 16:9 Optimized, 4:3 or Widescreen indi- cates the format currently selected.

X Select a format using the9: but- tons and press the 9 button to confirm.

System settings

Note You can adjust almost all system settings individually for each screen without affecting the other screen. You make these settings using the remote control (Y page 237).

Selecting the display language X Select System using the9=; buttons on the remote control and press9 to confirm. You see the system menu on the selected rear screen.

X Select Settings using the: button and press 9 to confirm.

X Select Language using the9: but- tons and press the 9 button to confirm. The list of languages appears. A# dot indicates the current setting.

X Select a language using the9: but- tons and press the 9 button to confirm. The Rear Seat Entertainment System acti- vates the selected language.

Switching the display design X Select Settings using the: button and press 9 to confirm.

X Select Day Mode, Night Mode or Auto matic using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The dot indicates the current setting.

Design Explanation

Day Mode The display is set per- manently to day design.

Night Mode The display is set per- manently to night design.

Automatic The display design changes depending on the vehicle instrument cluster illumination.

System settings 243

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

Setting the brightness X Select Settings using the: button and press 9 to confirm.

X Select Brightness using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm. A scale appears.

X Adjust the brightness using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm. The brightness bar moves up or down. The picture becomes lighter or darker in accordance with the scale.

Showing/hiding the picture X To hide the picture: select Display Off in the system menu using the:; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. The picture is hidden.

X To display the picture: press the 9 but- ton.

CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode

Important safety notes

G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiation. This laser radiation could damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. Never open the housing. Always have main- tenance and repair work carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop.

General notes You will find information on the following top- ics in the Audio section: Rnotes on CDs/DVDs (Y page 204) Rnotes on MP3 mode (Y page 202) Rnotes on copyright (Y page 204)

Inserting a CD/DVD

: Disc slot ; Disc eject button Depending on the vehicle model and equip- ment level, the CD/DVD drive is found: Rbehind the center console in a folding com- partment, or Runder the rear bench seat, or Rin the stowage box between the rear seats The CD/DVD drive is a single disc drive. If there is already a disc inserted, this must be ejected before another is inserted. X Insert a disc into the disc slot. The printed side of the disc must face upwards. If neither side of the disc is prin- ted, the side you wish to play must face downwards. The CD/DVD drive draws in the disc.

The CD/DVD drive plays the disc: Rif it has been inserted correctly and is a permissible disc, and Rafter you have switched to disc mode (audio CD/audio DVD/MP3 mode) (Y page 245)

Data on anMP3CD first needs to be loadedby the drive. Loading may take some time, depending on the number of folders and tracks.

244 CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Switching to audio CD, audio DVD or MP3 mode X Insert a CD/DVD (Y page 244). The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads the inserted disc.

X Select Disc in the menu using the 9=; buttons on the remote control and confirm by pressing the 9 button. The corresponding mode is switched on. The Rear Seat Entertainment System plays the disc.

i Variable bit rates in MP3 tracks can result in the elapsed time shown being different from the actual elapsed time.

Selecting a track

Selecting by skipping to a track X To skip forwards or backwards to a track: press the= or; button on the remote control.

or X Press theE orF button. The skip forward function skips to the next track. If the elapsed track time has passed 8 sec- onds, the function skips back to the begin- ning of the track. If the elapsed time is shorter, it will skip to the start of the pre- vious track. If the Random Tracks or Random Folder playback option has been selected, the track order is random.

Selecting by track list In audio CD mode, the track list contains all tracks on the disc currently playing. In audio DVDmode, the track list contains all tracks in the currently active group. InMP3mode, the track list shows all tracks in the currently active folder aswell as the folder

structure, allowing you to select any track on the MP3 CD. X Select Track List (audio CD/DVD mode) or Folder (MP3 mode) using the:=; buttons on the remote control, and confirm by pressing the 9 button.

or X Press the 9 button when the display/ selection window is active. The track list appears. The# dot indicates the current track.

X Select a track using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.

Making a selectionby entering the track number directly X Press theh button on the remote con- trol. The track entry display appears.

Example: track 2 X Press number button 2. Example: track 12 X Press the corresponding number keys in rapid succession.

X Wait for approximately three seconds after making the entry. You will hear the track which has been entered. The corresponding basic menu then reappears. i It is not possible to enter numbers that exceed the number of tracks on theCDor in the currently active folder.

Fast forwarding/rewinding X With the display/selection window active, press the= or; button on the

CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode 245

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

remote control repeatedly until you reach the desired position.

or X Press and hold theE orF button until the desired position is reached.

Selecting a folder This function is only available in MP3 mode. X Select Folder in MP3 mode using the:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

or X Press the 9 button when the display/ selection window is active. The folder content appears.

: Folder selection symbol ; Current folder name = Track symbol X To switch to the superordinate folder: select symbol: using the9: but- tons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. The display shows the next folder up.

: Folder selection symbol ; Folder symbol X Select a folder using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. You will see the tracks in the folder.

X Select a track using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The track is played and the corresponding folder is now the active folder.

Pause function This function is only available in audio DVD mode. X To pause playback: select using the:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. The display changes to.

X To continue playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. The display changes to.

Stop function This function is only available in audio DVD mode.

246 CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

X To interrupt playback: select using the:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. The display changes to.

X To continue playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it was interrupted.

X To stop playback: while playback is inter- rupted, select again and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback stops and returns to the begin- ning of the DVD. is highlighted.

X To restart playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback starts from the beginning of the DVD.

Setting the audio format The content of an audio DVD can be divided into up to 9 groups. The availability and type of group depends on the respective DVD. A group can contain music in different sound qualities (stereo and multichannel formats, for example), or bonus tracks. X Select DVD-Audio using the:=; buttons on the remote control and press 9 to confirm.

X Select Group using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The list of available audio formats appears. The# dot indicates the format currently selected.

X Select an audio format using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm.

X To exit the menu: press the= or; button.

Playback options Further information on playback options is available in the "Audio" section (Y page 202).

X Select CD, DVD-Audio or MP3 using the:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. The options list appears. The# dot indi- cates the option currently selected.

X Select Normal Track Sequence, Random Tracks or Random Folder using the 9: buttons and press the9 button to confirm. The option is switched on. For all options except Normal Track Sequence, you will see a corresponding display in the display/ selection window. i If you switch the data carrier which you are currently listening to, the Normal Track Sequence option is activated auto- matically. If an option is selected, it remains selected after the Rear Seat Enter- tainment System is switched on or off.

Switching track information on/off (MP3 mode only) If the function is switched on, folder and track names are displayed. If the function is switched off, disc and file names are displayed. X Select MP3 using the:=; but- tons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Display Track Information using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The function is switched on O or off , depending on the previous status.

Video DVD mode

Important safety notes

G WARNING The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product. If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive, there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser

Video DVD mode 247

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

radiation. This laser radiation could damage your retina. There is a risk of injury. Never open the housing. Always have main- tenance and repair work carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop.

General notes

DVD playback conditions Playback problems may occur when playing copied discs. There is a large variety of discs, DVD authoring software, writing software and writers available. This variety means that there is no guarantee that the Rear Seat Entertainment System will be able to play video DVDs that you have copied yourself. Further information can be found under video (Y page 227). Information regarding COMAND also applies to the Rear Seat Enter- tainment System.

Function restrictions Depending on the DVD, it is possible that cer- tain functions or actions described in this sectionwill be temporarily blocked ormay not function at all. As soon as you try to activate these functions or actions, youwill see theK symbol in the display.

Switching to video DVD mode X Insert a video DVD (Y page 244). The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads the disc. If disc mode was the last mode selected, it will now be active. If it was not, switch on video DVD mode as described in the following instruction.

X Select Disc in the menu using the 9=; buttons on the remote control and confirm by pressing the 9 button. If the video DVD fulfills the playback crite- ria, the film either starts automatically or

themenu stored on the DVD appears. If the DVDmenu appears, you must start the film manually.

X Select the corresponding menu item in the DVD menu.

Showing/hiding the control menu

Control menu displayed : Type of data medium ; Current title = Current scene ? Track time A Shows the menu X To show: press the9 or: button on the remote control.

X To hide: press the9 or: button. or X Wait about eight seconds.

248 Video DVD mode Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Showing/hiding the menu

Example: menu shown : Video DVD options ; Pause function = Stop function ? Media selection A Sound settings X To show: press the 9 button on the remote control.

or X Select Menu while the control menu is shown and press the 9 button to confirm.

X To hide: press the9 button, select Full Screen and press the 9 button to confirm.

Fast forwarding/rewinding X Press and hold theE orF button on the remote control until the desired posi- tion has been reached. You see the control menu.

Pause function X To show themenu: press the9 button on the remote control.

or X Select Menu while the control menu is shown and press the 9 button to confirm.

X To pause playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. The display changes to.

X To continue playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. The menu is hidden.

Stop function X To show themenu: press the9 button on the remote control.

or X Select Menu while the control menu is shown and press the 9 button to confirm.

X To interrupt playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. The display changes to. The video image is hidden.

X To continue playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it was interrupted. The menu is hidden.

X To stop playback: while playback is inter- rupted, select again and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback stops and returns to the begin- ning of the DVD. is highlighted.

X To restart playback: select and press the 9 button to confirm. Playback starts from the beginning of the DVD.

Selecting a scene/chapter

General notes Observe the information on DVD video mode (Y page 229).

Video DVD mode 249

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

Skipping forwards/backwards X Press the= or; button on the remote control.

or X Press theE orF button. The navigation menu (Y page 228) appears for approximately eight seconds.

Selecting a scene/chapter directly These examples illustrate how to select scene/chapter 5. X Option 1: while the film is playing, press theh button on the remote control.

X Press the corresponding number key, such as 5.

X Option 2: while the film is playing, press the 9 button on the remote control and show the menu.

X Select DVD-V and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Scene Selection and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select 5 using the9 or: button and press the 9 button to confirm. In both cases, playback will begin from the fifth scene/chapter after a brief pause.

Selecting a film/track Option 1: X Press the 9 button on the remote control and show the menu.

X Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button on the remote control to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Title Selection and press the 9 button to confirm.

X To call up the selection list: press the 9 button.

X Select a film/title. Option 2: Example: selecting film 2 X Press button 2. After a brief pause, the second film is played.

DVD menu

Calling up the DVD menu TheDVDmenu is themenu stored on theDVD itself. It is structured in various ways accord- ing to the individual DVD and permits certain actions and settings. In the case of multi-language DVDs, for exam- ple, you can change the DVD language in the DVD menu. X Press the 9 button on the remote control and show the menu.

X Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button on the remote control to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Menu and press the 9 button to confirm. The DVD menu appears.

250 Video DVD mode Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Selecting menu items in the DVD menu

X Select a menu item using the 9:=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. A menu appears.

X Confirm Select by pressing the 9 button. The Rear Seat Entertainment System car- ries out the action or shows a submenu.

X If available, additional options can now be selected. The Rear Seat Entertainment System then switches back to the DVD menu.

i Menu items which cannot be selected are shown in gray.

i Depending on the DVD, the menu items: Back (to the movie), Play, Stop,E, F or Go Upmay either not function at all or may not function at certain points in the DVD menu. To indicate this, theK symbol appears in the display.

Stopping a film or skipping to the begin- ning or end of a scene X Select any menu item from the DVD menu. The menu appears.

X To stop the film: select the Stop menu item and press the9 button on the remote control to confirm.

X To skip to the end of a scene: select the Fmenu item and press the9 button to confirm.

X To skip to the beginning of a scene: select theE menu item and press the 9 button to confirm.

Moving up one level in the DVD menu X Show the DVD menu. X Press the% back button on the remote control or select the corresponding menu item in the DVD menu.

or X Select anymenu item in the DVDmenu and pressW the COMAND controller to con- firm.

X Select Go Up and pressW to confirm.

Back to the film X Press the k button repeatedly until you see the movie.

or X Select anymenu item in the DVDmenu and press 9 to confirm.

X Select the Back (to the movie) menu item in themenu and press the9 button to confirm.

Setting the audio format This function is not available on all DVDs. If it is available, you can set the audio language or the audio format. The number of settings is determined by the DVD content. It may also be possible to access the settings from the DVD menu. X Press the 9 button on the remote control and show the menu.

X Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button on the remote control to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and press the 9 button to confirm.

Video DVD mode 251

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

X Select Audio Language and press the 9 button to confirm. A menu appears after a short while. The# dot in front of an entry indicates the cur- rently selected language.

X Select a language using the9: but- tons and press the 9 button to confirm.

X To exit the menu: press the= or; button.

Subtitles and camera angle These functions are not available on all DVDs. The number of subtitle languages and camera angles available depends on the content of theDVD. Itmay also be possible to access the settings from the DVD menu. X Press the 9 button on the remote control and show the menu.

X Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button on the remote control to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Subtitles or Camera Angle and press the 9 button to confirm. In both cases, a menu appears after a few seconds. The# dot in front of an entry indicates the current setting.

X Select a setting using the9: but- tons and press the 9 button to confirm.

X To exit the menu: press the= or; button.

Interactive content DVDs can also contain interactive content (e.g. a video game). In a video game, you may be able to influence events by selecting and triggering actions. The type and number of actions depend on the DVD. X Select an action using the 9;:= buttons on the

remote control and press the 9 button to execute it. Amenu appears and the first entry,Select, is highlighted.

X Press the 9 button.

Operation with an active COMAND source

Switching the function on/off in COMAND You can transfer an audio or video source selected in COMAND to the Rear Seat Enter- tainment System. If you subsequently switch modes in COMAND, the new source will not be transmitted to the Rear Seat Entertain- ment System. X To switch on the function in COMAND: switch to the desired audio mode in COMAND, e.g. CD mode (Y page 197), or show the menu in video DVD mode (Y page 228).

X Select the menu item at the bottom left, e.g. CD in audio CD mode, by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Active Aud./Vid. Source For Rear and pressW to confirm.

In the status bar at the top, you will see the headphones icon and the_ icon for the source that has been switched on. X To switch off the function in COMAND: switch on the desired audio mode in

252 Operation with an active COMAND source Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

COMAND or show the menu in video DVD mode.

X Select the menu item at the bottom left, e.g. CD in audio CD mode, by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Rear Audio/Video Off_ and pressW the COMAND controller to con- firm.

Selecting an active COMAND source on the rear-compartment screen

Loading the active COMAND source

X Select COMAND using the9=; buttons on the remote control and press9 to confirm. The audio or video source selected in COMAND is loaded in the Rear Seat Enter- tainment System.

When the loading process is complete, the audio or video source is set in the Rear Seat Entertainment System. If Rear Audio/Video Off is activated in COMAND, the COMAND is off or there is no active COMAND source message appears.

Audio CD mode X To select by skipping to a track: press the= or; button.

or X Press theE orF button. The skip forward function skips to the next track. If the elapsed track time has exceeded 8 seconds, the function skips back to the beginning of the track. If the elapsed track time is less than 8 sec- onds, the function skips back to the begin- ning of the previous track.

Additional setting option: RAdjusting the sound settings (Y page 242)

Audio DVD mode X To skip to the next/previous group: press the: button on the remote con- trol.

X To selectKL: highlight using the = or; button and press 9.

Additional setting option: RAdjusting the sound settings (Y page 242)

MP3 mode X To select a track by skipping to a track: press the= or; button on the remote control.

or X Press theE orF button. The skip forward function skips to the next track. If the elapsed track time has exceeded 8 seconds, the function skips back to the beginning of the track. If the elapsed track time is less than 8 sec- onds, the function skips back to the begin- ning of the previous track.

Operation with an active COMAND source 253

Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

X To select a folder: press the: button on the remote control.

X Highlight one of the two folder symbols with the= or; button and press 9 to confirm. Depending on your selection, the previous or next folder is selected and the first track is played.

Additional setting option: RAdjusting the sound settings (Y page 242)

Video DVD mode X To hide a menu: confirm Menu with the 9 button. The video image is played in full screen mode.

Additional setting options: RAdjusting the brightness, contrast and color (Y page 242) RChanging the picture format (Y page 243) RAdjusting the sound settings (Y page 242)

AUX mode

Introduction You can connect one external video source to each of the displays of the Rear Seat Enter- tainment System (AUX display) and also one external video source to the rear-compart- ment CD/DVD drive (AUX drive) with a sound and video signal. Please see the corresponding operating instructions for information on how to oper- ate the external video source. For further details about external video sour- ces, please consult an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center.

Connecting AUX equipment

AUX drive The AUX drive jacks are located on the CD/DVD drive next to the CD/DVD eject but- ton (Y page 238).

Displaying AUX The AUX display jacks are on the side of the screen (Y page 237).

Audio and video connection X Insert the audio plugs for the left and right signals into the corresponding L and R jacks.

X Insert the video plug into the V jack.

Activating AUX mode

AUX drive X Select Aux in the menu using the 9=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm. The AUX menu appears.

X Select Source from the AUX menu and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Disc Drive Aux and press the 9 button to confirm. You will hear and see the content of the external video source if it is connected to the CD/DVD drive and switched to play- back. If no video image is available from the AUX source connected, you will see an audio menu.

Displaying AUX X Select the screen by turning the scroll wheel on the remote control (Y page 237)

254 AUX mode Re ar

Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

until "L REAR " (left screen) or "REAR R" (right screen) is highlighted in the window.

X Select Aux in the menu using the 9=; buttons on the remote control and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Source from the AUX menu and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Display Aux and press the 9 but- ton to confirm. You will see and hear the content of the video source if it is switched to playback. If no video image is available from the AUX source connected, you will see an audio menu.

Adjusting treble and bass X Select Treble or Bass in the AUX menu and press the 9 button on the remote control to confirm. An adjustment scale appears.

X Select a setting using the9 or: button and press the 9 button to confirm.

Adjusting the brightness, contrast or color X Select Display Aux or Disc Drive Aux in the AUX menu and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select Brightness, Contrast or Color and press the 9 button to confirm. An adjustment scale appears.

X Select a setting using the9 or: button and press the 9 button to confirm.

Changing the picture format X Select Display Aux or Disc Drive Aux in the AUX menu and press the 9 button to confirm.

X Select 16:9 Optimized, 4:3 or Wide screen using the9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm. The dot in front of a menu item indicates the current setting.

AUX mode 255

Re ar Se at En te rt ai nm

en tS

ys te m

Z

256

Your COMAND equipment ................ 258 Introduction ...................................... 258 Switching the SIRIUS Weather dis- play on/off ........................................ 258 Displaying detailed information ...... 259 Selecting the area for the weather forecast ............................................. 259 Memory functions ............................. 261 Weather map ..................................... 262

257

SI RI US

W ea th er

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all the standard and optional equipment for your COMAND system, as available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your COMAND system may not be equipped with all the features described.

Introduction

i This function is currently not available for Canada.

For the reception of weather forecasts via satellite radio, you will need a SIRIUS XM Sat- ellite Weather subscription. When the Call SIRIUS to activate sys tem at 888-539-7474 message with the SIRIUS device identification number appears, you will first have to obtain access to the weather service. A description of the proce- dure can be found in the "Registering satellite radio" section (Y page 191). COMAND can receive weather forecasts via satellite radio for the entire USA (including Alaska and Hawaii). The received weather data can be displayed as an information chart (daily forecast, five-day forecast, detailed information) or on the weather map. The weather data received from a weather station is stored in COMAND for one hour. It can therefore be displayed again immediately after restarting the engine (for example after refueling). The weather map can display the following weather data with symbols: Rrain radar Rstorm characteristics Rareas of high-pressure/low-pressure, weather fronts Rcourse of tropical cyclones (hurricanes, typhoons) Rwind direction and speeds

i The rain radar cannot be displayed for Alaska, Hawaii and Puerto Rico.

i Hurricane: termused to describe the trop- ical cyclones that primarily develop in the Atlantic, North Pacific and South Pacific oceans. Thewind speeds are above 74mph (118 km/h). Five categories are used to classify the strength of a hurricane. Typhoon: term used to describe a tropical cyclone that develops in the northwestern Pacific. Thewind speeds are in the category of a hurricane.

Switching the SIRIUSWeather display on/off

Switching on

Example: daily forecast as an information chart X Select the symbol in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the

258 Switching the SIRIUS Weather display on/off SI RI US

W ea th er

COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm. The SIRIUS Weather basic display appears.

X Confirm SIRIUS Weather by pressingW. The information chart shows the daily fore- cast at the current vehicle position.

You see the following information: Rthe date and time of the weather message received last Rinformation on the current weather (tem- perature, cloud cover) and forecast for the next 3, 6, 12 hours Rthe current highest temperature and fore- cast Rthe current lowest temperature and fore- cast Rthe probability of rain

Example: five-day forecast as an information chart X To switch to a five-day forecast: confirm 5-day by pressingW. The information chart displays the forecast for the next five days in the currently selec- ted location.

X To return to the current forecast: con- firm Current by pressingW.

Switching off X Press the k back button. or X Select Back by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Both options appear in the SIRIUS Weather basic display.

Displaying detailed information

Besides the current temperatures, you can display information such as wind speeds and UV index. X Select Info in the information chart by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The information chart shows detailed infor- mation for the selected area.

Selecting the area for the weather forecast

Introduction You can select the following areas: Rthe current vehicle position Rvicinity of the destination Ra winter sports area Ran area within the USA You can select an area in the information chart (option 1), on themap (option 2) or from the memory. To select from the memory you must first save an area (Y page 261).

Selecting the area for the weather forecast 259

SI RI US

W ea th er

i COMAND receives weather forecast data from the nearest weather station at the selected location.

Selecting the location in the informa- tion chart

"Selecting the area for the weather forecast" menu X Select Position in the information chart by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X To select the current vehicle position: confirm Current Position in themenu by pressingW. COMAND receives the weather data for the current vehicle position from the nearest weather station and displays it automati- cally.

X To select the vicinity of the destination: select Near Destination in the menu by turning cV d the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. i You can select Near Destination once a route has been calculated (Y page 69). The menu item is otherwise grayed out.

Selecting a state (searching for winter sport areas)

X To select awinter sports area: select In Winter Sports Areas in the menu and pressW to confirm.

X Select a state, e.g. Colorado and pressW to confirm.

X Select a winter sports area from the menu and pressW to confirm. The weather data and other information is displayed for the winter sports area that has been selected. The data is supplied by the nearest weather station. The information chart shows the following information (if available): Rski slopes/ski lifts Rsnowboarding and nighttime opening Rsnow conditions (e.g. snow depth) Rtemperature

260 Selecting the area for the weather forecast SI RI US

W ea th er

Selecting a state (searching for an area)

X To search for a city: select a state, e.g. Florida and pressW to confirm.

X Select a city, e.g. Daytona Beach and pressW to confirm. The information chart shows the weather forecast for the selected area. The data is supplied by the nearest weather station.

Selecting the location in the weather map X Call up the weather map (Y page 262). X Move the weather map so that the cross- hair is over the desired area (Y page 262).

X PressW the COMAND controller. The information chart shows the weather forecast for the selected area. The data is supplied by the nearest weather station.

Memory functions

Storing the area in the weather mem- ory For areas that are frequently called up, 10 presets (0 9) are available in the weather memory. X In the weather memory: select the area for the weather forecast (Y page 259). The selected area is shown at the top in the status bar.

X Select Position in the information chart by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Memory and pressW to confirm. X Select the preset by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller.

X Press and holdW the COMAND controller until you hear a tone. The area is entered on the selected preset.

X To store rapidly: in the daily forecast (Y page 258) press and hold a number key, e.g.l, until the preset position number is shown in the status bar in front of the area name. i You can also use this function: Rin the five-day forecast (Y page 259) Rin the detailed information view (Y page 259).

Selecting an area from the weather memory X From the weather memory: in the infor- mation chart, select Position by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Memory and pressW to confirm.

Memory functions 261

SI RI US

W ea th er

X Select a preset that contains an entry by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The weather data for the selected area is displayed.

X Rapid selection: if there is an entry avail- able in the weather memory, e.g. when the daily forecast is shown, briefly press a num- ber key, such asl. The weather data for the selected area is displayed.

Weather map

Calling up the weather map

Example: weather map X Select Map in the information chart by turn- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The weather map is shown on a 500-mi or 500-km scale. i For the map display, you can activate the topographic map style (Y page 112).

Moving the weather map X Slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller. The weather mapmoves in the correspond- ing direction under the crosshair.

Changing the scale

X As soon as you turn cVd the COMAND controller, you see the scale bar.

X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.

Showing/hiding the menu in the weather map

X To show: pressW the COMAND controller in the weather map.

X To hide: slide up ZV the COMAND con- troller.

262 Weather map SI RI US

W ea th er

Selecting a weather station in the map X Move the weathermap and crosshair to the desired position (Y page 262).

X PressW the COMAND controller. The menu is shown.

X Confirm Display Weather by pressingW. COMAND receives the weather data for the selected position from the nearest weather station and displays it automatically as a daily forecast.

Switching layers on the map on/off

You can switch on different layers, for exam- ple to display the rain radar, weather fronts and the course of tropical storms on themap. X Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 262).

X Select Map Options by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm. A menu appears.

X Select the layer by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Switch the display on O or off .

Weather map 263

SI RI US

W ea th er

Explanation of the layers on the weather map

Layer Map display Selectable scales

Radar Map Shows the rain radar as a colored area on themap. For an explanation of the colors, see the legend (Y page 267).

All

Storm Character istics

Shows the characteristics of a storm Characteristics are: Rtornadic storm: storm cell with strong winds (super cell), from which a tornado can develop. Tornadoes are also known as twisters. Rcyclone: storm cells from which a tornadic storm can develop Rhailstorm Rthe likelihood of a hailstorm

All

Atmospheric Pressure

Shows the position of high and low-pressure areas (H, L), weather fronts and isobars

200 miles (200 km) 500 miles (500 km)

Tropical Storm Tracks

Shows the path/directional movement speed of a tropical storm with time and strength information

All

Winds Shows the wind direction and wind speed 5 miles (5 km)

Sample displays of weather data in the map

Weather map showing the rain radar

Conditions: the Radar Map layer is active (Y page 263) and weather data is available. The precipitation radar legend can be called up at (Y page 267).

264 Weather map SI RI US

W ea th er

Displaying storm characteristics

Conditions: the Storm Characteristics layer is active (Y page 263) and weather data is available. The example shows hail showers and tornadic storms together with direction and speed of propagation. The storms legend can be called up (Y page 267).

Example: weather map with information on a cyclone X Slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller and move the crosshair onto a corresponding symbol.

X PressW the COMAND controller. The following information is shown (if availa- ble): Rcharacteristics of the storm cell Rdate and time of observation (time stamp) Rdirectional movement speed and path

i The directional movement speed is the speed at which the storm cell moves.

Example: weather map showing weather fronts

Conditions: the Atmospheric Pressure layer is switched on (Y page 263) andweather data is available. The example shows the position of high and low-pressure areas (H, L), weather fronts and isobars.

i Isobars are lines that show where the air pressure is the same.

Legend: weather fronts : Cold front (blue line with blue triangles) ; Warm front (red line with red semi-circles) = Stationary front (red-blue line with red

semi-circles and blue triangles) ? Occlusion (violet line with a violet semi-

circle and triangles)

Weather map 265

SI RI US

W ea th er

Weather front

Explanation

Cold front If a cold front moves in, the weather remains changeable and there are often rain show- ers and thunderstorms. The air temperature decreases.

Warm front This can mean longer periods of rain and can lead to an increase in cloud cover and a slow increase in temperature.

Stationary front

The weather front moves min- imally. The weather remains changeable in this area.

Occlusion This occurswhen a faster cold front reaches an advancing warm front and combines with it. The weather remains changeable and rainy within an occlusion.

Example: weather map showing the progress of a tropical storm : Position on the forecast path ; Current position of the cyclone = Position on the previous path Conditions: the Tropical Storm Tracks layer is switched on (Y page263) andweather data is available. A dotted line shows the previous path and the forecast path of a tropical low-pressure area (cyclone).

Information on a cyclone

You can select individual points (:,; and =) on the path and display further informa- tion on them. X In the map, slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller and slide the crosshair to:,; or=.

X PressW the COMAND controller. Showing information (if available): Rname of the tropical storm and category Rtime stamp Rspeed and direction of propagation (Wind) Rmaximum wind speed (Max. Wind Speed) i The directional movement speed is the speed at which the storm cell of a tropical storm moves.

A tropical storm is separated into different categories according to the location at which it develops.

Region of origin Category

Atlantic, North and South Pacific Oceans

Tropical Low Pressure System

Atlantic, North and South Pacific Oceans

Tropical Rain Zone

Atlantic, North and South Pacific Oceans

Tropical Storm

266 Weather map SI RI US

W ea th er

Region of origin Category

Atlantic, North and South Pacific Oceans

Hurricane Cate gory 1 to Hurri cane Category 5

Northwestern Pacific Ocean

Tropical Low Pressure System

Northwestern Pacific Ocean

Tropical Cyclone

Northwestern Pacific Ocean

Typhoon

Northwestern Pacific Ocean

Super-Typhoon

You can also see the time stamp for the weather data on map scales of 50 miles and smaller. The weather map shows wind directions and wind speeds.

Legend (precipitation radar and storms)

X Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 262).

X Select Map Options by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Legend and pressW to confirm. i The symbol for a tornadic storm is also valid for a cyclone (mesocyclone).

Precipitation type Color scale

Rain Seven color levels from light (light green) to heavy (red)

Mixed Light (light violet) to heavy (violet)

Snow Light (light tur- quoise) to heavy (turquoise)

Time stamp

Weather map 267

SI RI US

W ea th er

The time stamp showswhen theweather data was created by the weather station. A time stamp corresponds to the time at the vehicle's current position. The changeover from summer time to standard time is per- formed automatically. X Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 262).

X Select Map Options by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to con- firm.

X Select Time Stamp and pressW to con- firm.

Changing to the information chart<

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the C-Class Mercedes-Benz works, you can view and download the Mercedes-Benz C-Class Coupe 2015 Operating Instructions on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operating Instructions for Mercedes-Benz C-Class as well as other Mercedes-Benz manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operating Instructions should include all the details that are needed to use a Mercedes-Benz C-Class. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mercedes-Benz C-Class Coupe 2015 Operating Instructions is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mercedes-Benz C-Class Coupe 2015 Operating Instructions consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mercedes-Benz C-Class Coupe 2015 Operating Instructions free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mercedes-Benz C-Class Coupe 2015 Operating Instructions, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mercedes-Benz C-Class Coupe 2015 Operating Instructions as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.